1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/ar/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \AtBeginDocument{\setdefaultlanguage[numerals=maghrib]{arabic}} %%%% without this line nomenclature list not appear in pdf.
50 %\renewcommand{\nomname}{المصطلحات}%% used arabic title for nomname
51 \newcommand\lettergroup[1]{} % without this line "unknown english letters" appear in the index list in pdf.
53 \setlength{\parskip}{\medskipamount}
54 \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children no
63 \language arabic_arabi
64 \language_package default
67 \font_roman "lmodern" "Scheherazade"
68 \font_sans "lmss" "Scheherazade"
69 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "Scheherazade"
70 \font_math "auto" "auto"
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts true
75 \font_typewriter_osf false
77 \font_sf_scale 100 100
78 \font_tt_scale 100 100
80 \use_dash_ligatures false
82 \default_output_format pdf4
84 \bibtex_command bibtex
85 \index_command default
89 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
90 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
94 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
95 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
96 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
101 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
102 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
105 \use_package amsmath 1
106 \use_package amssymb 1
107 \use_package cancel 1
109 \use_package mathdots 1
110 \use_package mathtools 1
111 \use_package mhchem 1
112 \use_package stackrel 1
113 \use_package stmaryrd 1
114 \use_package undertilde 1
116 \cite_engine_type default
120 \paperorientation portrait
125 \notefontcolor #0000ff
143 \paragraph_separation indent
144 \paragraph_indentation default
146 \math_numbering_side default
151 \paperpagestyle default
152 \tracking_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
154 \output_changes false
163 دليل مستخدم ليك \SpecialChar LyX
172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
174 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
175 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
176 Documentation mailing list:
177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
179 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Note Note
202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
205 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
219 \begin_layout Standard
220 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
221 LatexCommand tableofcontents
228 \begin_layout Chapter
232 \begin_layout Section
233 ما هو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
237 \begin_layout Standard
238 ليك هو نظام إعداد وثائق.
239 إنه أداة لإنتاج المخطوطات الجميلة والكتب القابلة للنشر، خطابات الأعمال
240 والمقترحات، وحتى الشعر.
241 وهو يختلف عن معظم "معالجات الكلمات" بأنه يستخدم نموذج لغة الترميز كأسلوب
243 وهذا يعني أنه عند كتابة عنوان القسم، ووضع علامة عليه ك "قسم" فإنه سيقوم
244 باختيار الحجم واللون والمحاذاة تلقائيا بالصورة المثالية المتعارف عليها،
245 ولا يحتاج أن تحدد له "خط ثخين، حجمه 17pt ، محاذاة يسار، ...".
246 ليك يعتني بالتنضيد لأجلك.
247 لذلك يمكنك التركيز فقط على محتوى كتابك، وليس على آلية التنضيد.
250 \begin_layout Standard
251 وهذه الفلسفة تم شرحها بمزيد من التفصيل في كتيب المقدمة.
252 إذا كنت لم تقرأه بعد، فأنت بالتأكيد تحتاج إلى ذلك.
253 نعم، نحن نعني الآن من فضلك.
256 \begin_layout Standard
257 كتيب المقدمة يصف عدة أشياء بالإضافة إلى فلسفة ليك: الأشياء الأكثر أهمية،
259 إذا كنت لم تقرأه، سيكون عليك تخصيص جزء من وقتك لتصفحه.
260 وربما يكون من الأفضل الاطلاع بشكل سريع على بقية كتيبات المساعدة.
264 \begin_layout Section
265 كيف يبدو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
269 \begin_layout Standard
270 مثل معظم التطبيقات، ليك لديه شريط القوائم المألوف في الجزء العلوي من النافذة.
271 وتحته شريط الأدوات مع مربع القائمة المنسدلة وأزرار مختلفة.
272 هناك، بطبيعة الحال، شريط التمرير الرأسي ومنطقة عمل رئيسية لتحرير الوثائق.لاحظ
273 أنه لا يوجد شريط تمرير أفقي.
274 هذا ليس خطأ أو سهو، ولكنه مقصود.
275 فعند قراءتك كتاب، تتوقع نهاية السطر لتنتقل للسطر التالي.
276 لكن النص في ليك يتوزع على الصفحات بطريقة عمودية، وبالتالي نحتاج إلى شريط
278 إن هناك ثلاث حالات قد تجعلنا نرغب بشريط التمرير الأفقي.
279 الحالة الأولى هي الصور الكبيرة.
280 ولتجنب عرضها أكبر من الشاشة، انقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الصورة واستخدام
281 الخيار على مقاس الشاشة في علامة التبويب خيارات لتيك و ليك.
282 الحالات الثانية والثالثة هي الجداول والمعادلات التي هي أوسع من نافذة ليك.
283 يمكنك استخدام مفاتيح الأسهم للتمرير أفقيا من خلال الجدول، ولكن هذا لا يعمل
284 مع للمعادلات حتى الآن.
287 \begin_layout Standard
288 للحصول على وصف موجز لجميع قوائم ليك وأشرطة الأدوات ، ألقِ نظرة على الملحق
293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
295 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
302 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 يتكون نظام المساعدة من كتيبات ليك.
308 ويمكنك قراءة جميع الكتيبات من داخل ليك.
309 وما عليك سوى اختيار كتيب الذي تريد قراءته من قائمة مساعدة.
312 \begin_layout Section
313 الإعدادات الأساسية لليك \SpecialChar LyX
315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
317 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 معظم مميزات ليك يمكن ضبطها من خلال قائمة
327 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
332 \begin_inset Index idx
335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
341 ليك قادر على فحص نظامك لمعرفة البرامج المتوفرة عليه، مثل حزم لتيك وأنواع
343 إنه يساعدك على استخدم هذه المعلومات لإعداد التفضيلات الافتراضية المثالية
345 على الرغم من أن ليك يقوم بهذه العملية آليا عند تركيبه لأول مره.
346 ومن المستحسن القيام بعملية إعادة الضبط
348 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
351 إعادة ضبط النظام كل فترة،
352 \begin_inset Index idx
355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
361 لأن حزم لتيك تتحدث كل فترة، ويجب أن لا ننسى إعادة تشغيل ليك بعد إعادة الضبط
365 \begin_layout Section
366 إعداد لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
370 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
377 \begin_layout Standard
378 تستطيع تحرير مستند \SpecialChar LyX
379 بدون تركيب \SpecialChar LaTeX
380 ، لكنك لن تستطيع إنتاج ملفات PDF أو طباعة
382 إن بعض مستندات \SpecialChar LyX
383 تستخدم DocBook وأمثاله كخلفية لإنتاج ملفات PDF .
384 وكل مستند \SpecialChar LyX
385 يمكن تصديره كملف نصي بسيط أو صفحة ويب تفاعلية XHTML .
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 بعض أنواع المستندات ربما تعتمد على حزم خاصة من \SpecialChar LaTeX
391 ومع هذا بعض المستندات يمكن استخدامها حتى بدون تركيب الحزم المطلوبة، لكنك
392 بالتأكيد لن تستطيع إنتاج أو تصديرها إلى أي نوع من الملفات.
395 \begin_layout Standard
396 حزم \SpecialChar LaTeX
397 الموجودة على النظام يمكن مشاهدتها في \SpecialChar LyX
400 مساعدة\SpecialChar menuseparator
402 إذا افتقدت حزم تحتاجها، فإن عليك تركيبها ثم إعادة ضبط
407 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
411 \begin_inset Index idx
414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
424 جديدة في كتيب التخصيص لتعرف معلومات أكثر عن تركيب حزم
430 \begin_layout Chapter
431 كيف تعمل مع \SpecialChar LyX
435 \begin_layout Section
437 \begin_inset Index idx
440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
449 \begin_layout Standard
450 تحت قائمة ملف وفي شريط الأدوات القياسي توجد العمليات الأساسية التي تراها
451 في أي معالج كلمات بالإضافة إلى بعض العمليات المتقدمة:
454 \begin_layout Itemize
476 \begin_layout Itemize
492 arg "buffer-new-template"
498 \begin_layout Itemize
520 \begin_layout Itemize
530 \begin_layout Itemize
544 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
578 arg "buffer-write-as"
584 \begin_layout Itemize
594 \begin_layout Itemize
608 \begin_layout Standard
609 يمكننا أن نقوم بالكثير من الأشياء الجميلة بالشكل الذي نقوم به في معالجات
610 الكلمات الأخرى.، مع بعض الاختلافات البسيطة.
613 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
622 قالب يعرض قائمة بالقوالب المتاحة.
623 وعند اختيار قالب معين سوف يتم آليا تعيين خصائص النسق الخاص به للمستند،
624 إن هذه الخصائص كان عليك تعديلها يدويا لكن
630 فربما تستخدم نوع معين من المستندات، وخصوصا كتابة الرسائل (أنظر قسم
633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
635 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
644 \begin_layout Standard
647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
680 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
681 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
682 is just that — a big, blank space.
690 \begin_layout Standard
691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
696 \begin_inset Quotes fld
700 \begin_inset Quotes frd
704 \begin_inset Quotes fld
708 \begin_inset Quotes frd
712 إلا إذا طلبت من \SpecialChar LyX
713 إنشاء ملف جديد أو فتح ملف موجود.
721 \begin_layout Standard
741 الإصدار عملية لكثير من الناس الذين يعملون على نفس المستند وفي نفس الوقت.
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
748 إذا كنت تخطط لعمل هذا، فإن عليك الخروج من ميزة تحكم الإصدار في \SpecialChar LyX
750 اقرأ كتيب خصائص إضافية.
766 للمحفوظ سوف تعيد تحميل المستند من القرص الصلب.
767 أنت تستطيع استخدامه أيضا إذا ندمت على تعديل المستند وأردت الرجوع لآخر حفظ.
776 الإصدار تستطيع تسجيل التعديلات التي صنعتها في مستند معين وبهذا يستطيع الآخرين
780 \begin_layout Section
781 عمليات التحرير الأساسية
782 \begin_inset Index idx
785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
794 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
801 \begin_layout Standard
802 مثل معظم معالجات النصوص الحديثة، \SpecialChar LyX
803 يستطيع القيام بعمليات قص ولصق مقاطع نصية،
804 ويستطيع نقل كلمات أو نصوص، ويستطيع حذف الكلمات والحروف طبعا.
805 الأقسام الأربعة التالية تغطي مميزات التحرير الأساسية في \SpecialChar LyX
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 كما قد تتوقع بالضبط، قائمة تحرير وشريط الأدوات القياسي يملك وظائف القص واللصق،
812 مع وظائف التحرير المعروفة الأخرى.
813 بعض منها خاص وتم شرحه في أقسام أخرى.
816 \begin_layout Standard
820 \begin_layout Itemize
822 \begin_inset Index idx
825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
854 \begin_layout Itemize
856 \begin_inset Index idx
859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_layout Itemize
890 \begin_inset Index idx
893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
918 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_layout Itemize
938 \begin_layout Itemize
952 \begin_inset Index idx
955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_inset Index idx
967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
982 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
992 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
998 \begin_layout Standard
999 إن أول ثلاثة أشياء تعرفها، أنك تستطيع نسخ النصوص بين ليك والبرامج الأخرى
1000 باستخدام قص، نسخ ولصق.
1001 قص و لصق تضع النص داخل الحافظة في شكلين (مهيأ وغير مهيأ)، لهذا البرامج
1002 الأخرى تستطيع اختيار الشكل المناسب لها.
1003 أما وظيفة لصق فتدعم الاختيار اليدوي للنص المهيأ أو غير المهيأ عن طريق قائمة
1004 تحرير، وطبعا يمكن قص ونسخ ولصق الصور.
1005 إن هذه الوظائف تحاول التعامل مع محتوى الحافظة بطريقة ذكية.
1006 مثلا إذا كان النص في الحافظة بهيئة CSV والمؤشر داخل الجدول، فإن النص سيلصق
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1017 لصق تظهر لك قائمة بآخر الأشياء التي لصقتها، وتستطيع إدراج أي واحد منها في
1018 المكان الذي به المؤشر عن طريق النقر على أي واحد منها في القائمة.
1021 \begin_layout Standard
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1028 خاص فتحتوي على عناصر اختيارية لهيئات ملفات خاصة، بناء على محتوى الحافظة.
1030 مثل HTML، \SpecialChar LaTeX
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 ، PDF، PNG، JPEG و EMF.
1048 عناصر هذه القائمة تكون عملية إذا كانت الحافظة بها نفس المحتوى ولكن بهيئات
1049 مختلفة، واردت اختيار هيئة واحدة.
1050 (مثلا بعض البرامج تقوم بنسخ الصور في الحافظة كرسم وكنص) عنصر القائمة لصق
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1054 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1067 الأسطر يشبه ما سبق، مع اختلاف واحد وهو أنه يعمل مع النصوص فقط.
1068 إنه سوف يدرج النص من الحافظة ولهذا سيدرج كل النصوص في الحافظة كفقرة واحدة.
1069 والفقرة الجديدة ستبدأ في سطر فارغ جديد.
1071 \begin_inset space ~
1074 السطور سيدرج النص كفقرات في المكان الذي الذي انتهى فيه السطر.
1075 كمثال عملي نسخ محتوى جدول من صفحة ويب إلى جدول في ليك.
1077 \begin_inset space ~
1080 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1086 \begin_inset space ~
1094 \begin_inset space ~
1097 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1098 التحديد من التحديد الرئيسي.
1099 هذا عادة هو النص المحدد حاليا.
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1105 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1107 \begin_inset space ~
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1127 وبمجرد العثور على الكلمة أو الجملة المطلوبة، سيقوم
1133 النقر على زر استبدال سيستبدل الكلمة المحددة بالكلمة أو الجملة التي كتبتها
1135 وتستطيع النقر على زر بحث التالي لتخطي الكلمة الحالية.
1136 أما النقر على زر استبدال الكل سوف يستبدل كل الكلمة المراد استبدالها بشكل
1138 إن خيار حالة الأحرف يمكن استخدامه إذا كنت تريد أن يراعي البحث حالة الأحرف
1139 الانجليزية (Capital، small) .
1140 فإذا تم اختياره، لن تجد وظيفة البحث كلمة Test إذا كتبت الكلمة في حقل البحث
1142 الخيار التالي هو كلمات كاملة فقط، فمثلا عند البحث عن كلمة يذهب لن يتوقف
1143 عند كلمة يذهبون لأنها غير مطابقة لها تماما في عدد الأحرف.
1149 أيضا ميزة البحث المتقدم والذي يحتوي على خيارات أكثر، ويمكن الاطلاع على
1150 تفاصيل أكثر عنه في قسم
1153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1155 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1162 \begin_layout Standard
1165 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1166 \begin_inset space \space{}
1170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1178 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1180 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1185 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1192 \begin_layout Standard
1193 استخدام الاختصار Ctrl+A سيحدد كامل النص في المستند.
1194 بينما لو استخدمنا نفس الاختصار أثناء وجود المؤشر داخل مربع إدارج (ملاحظة
1195 مظللة مثلا) فإنه سيتم تحديد ما في داخل الملاحظة المظللة فقط.
1196 لكن النقر على Ctrl+A بشكل متتالي سيجعل التحديد يشمل مربع الإدراج، ثم سيقوم
1197 بتحديد كامل المستند.
1198 أخيرا إذا استخدمنا المفاتيح Ctrl+Alt+A فإن كامل المستند سيتم تحديده بالإضافة
1199 إلى أن المؤشر سيصبح في نهاية المستند.
1202 \begin_layout Section
1204 \begin_inset Index idx
1207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1214 \begin_inset Index idx
1217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1226 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1233 \begin_layout Standard
1234 إذا وقعت بخطأ، يمكنك العودة عنه بسهولة.
1236 يخصص سعة كبيرة في الذاكرة المؤقتة لخاصيتي تراجع/تكرار.
1239 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1248 في شريط الأدوات لتراجع عن خطأ ما.
1249 وإذا تراجعت أكثر من اللازم يمكنك استخدام
1275 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1288 إن خاصية التراجع والتكرار محدودة بمئة خطوة لعدم استهلاك الذاكرة.
1291 \begin_layout Standard
1292 لاحظ أنك إذا تراجعت عن جميع الخطوات، أي إلى آخر عملية حفظ، فإن مفتاح الترجع
1293 سيصبح غير مفعل، ولن تستطيع للأسف التراجع عن عمليات قمت بها سابقا.
1296 \begin_layout Standard
1297 عمليتي التراجع و التكرار تعمل مع أي شيء في \SpecialChar LyX
1298 ، لكنها لا تسمح بالتراجع حرف
1299 حرف، وإنما التراجع عن كامل المقطع.
1302 \begin_layout Section
1304 \begin_inset Index idx
1307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1316 \begin_layout Standard
1317 هذه أهم عمليات أساسية تقوم بها الفارة
1320 \begin_layout Enumerate
1325 \begin_layout Itemize
1326 عند النقر بزر الفارة الأيسر في أي مكان من المستند في نافذة التحرير.
1327 نقرة واحدة يصبح المؤشر داخل النص، وعند النقر على الكلمة نقرتين يم تحديد
1328 الكلمة، وعند النقر عليها ثلاث مرات يتم تحديد كامل السطر.
1332 \begin_layout Enumerate
1337 \begin_layout Itemize
1338 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد أن يبدأ التحديد ثم انقر على زر الفارة الأيسر، ثم اسحب
1339 إلى نهاية التحديد وارفع إصبعك عن زر الفارة.
1340 سيقوم \SpecialChar LyX
1341 بتحديد النص بين نقطتي البداية والنهاية اللتين قمت بتحديدهما.
1344 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1345 نسخ أو Ctrl+C لإنشاء نسخة من النص في الحافظة.
1348 \begin_layout Itemize
1349 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد لصق النص في نافذة التحرير ثم
1351 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1356 \begin_layout Enumerate
1357 الإدراج (تذييل، ملاحظة، تعويم، إلخ.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1362 أنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الكائن الذي أدرجته ثم اختر إعدادات.
1363 أيضا اطلع على appropriate القسم في هذا الكتيب للمزيد من التفاصيل.
1367 \begin_layout Section
1369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1371 name "sec:Navigating"
1376 \begin_inset Index idx
1379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1388 \begin_layout Standard
1390 يعرض عليك عدة طرق للاستكشاف داخل المستندات:
1393 \begin_layout Itemize
1394 قائمة استكشاف تحتوي قائمة بكل أقسام المستند وتستطيع الانتقال لأي منها بالنقر
1398 \begin_layout Itemize
1399 الخلاصة، تستطيع الوصول لها عن طريق
1401 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1408 الخلاصة أو بالنقر على رمز الخلاصة
1411 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1417 \begin_layout Itemize
1418 يمكنك تعيين العلامات الإشارات المرجعية في مستندك عن طريق
1420 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1423 العلامات ومن نفس القائمة يمكنك العودة لها.
1424 مع ملاحظة أن هذه العلامات تحفظ بين الجلسات.
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1431 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1436 أو استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1437 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
1439 \begin_inset space ~
1444 للخلف أو Ctrl+< سوف يعود بك لأخر موقع قمت بالتعديل عليه.
1445 وهذا عملي عندما يكون لديك مستند كبير وتكون في جزء معين منه لمشاهدة شيء
1446 ما، ثم ترغب بالعودة لآخر مكان قمت بتعديله.
1449 \begin_layout Standard
1450 أخير بالنقر على زر F5 يتحرك مؤشر الفارة إلى وسط نافذة التحرير.
1453 \begin_layout Subsection
1455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1457 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1462 \begin_inset Index idx
1465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1472 \begin_inset Index idx
1475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 في أعلى نافذة الخلاصة توجد قائمة منسدلة، تستطيع من خلال اختيار عدة أنواع
1486 من القوائم، مثل جدول المحتويات، وقائمة الرسوم التوضيحية وقائمة الجداول
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1495 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1499 )، أو الملاحظات ولاستشهادات (أنظر القسم
1500 \begin_inset space ~
1504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1506 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1514 إن النقر على أي من محتويات هذه القوائم سوف ينتقل بك إليه.
1517 \begin_layout Standard
1518 عند النقر على أي عنصر بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يعرض الخيارات والإعدادات الخاصة
1519 به، مثلا النقر على استشهاد معين بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يظهر خيار إعدادات
1520 ليسمح لك بالتعديل على الاستشهاد.
1523 \begin_layout Standard
1524 إن حقل المرشح في أعلى النافذة يسمح لك بتقييد المدخلات التي ستظهر في الخلاصة.
1525 مثلا، إذا كنت تعرض قائمة الملصقات والمراجع وترغب برؤية مراجع الأقسام الفرعية
1526 فقط، أكتب كلمة sub في المرشح، عندها سيتم عرض العناصر التي تحتوي هذه الكلمة
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1533 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1534 you further to control the display.
1539 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1540 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1546 option keeps it in the current view state.
1547 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1548 \begin_inset space ~
1551 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1552 \begin_inset space ~
1555 3, the subsections of sections
1556 \begin_inset space ~
1559 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1564 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1565 \begin_inset space ~
1569 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1579 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1582 \begin_layout Standard
1583 في اسفل نافذة الخلاصة توجد عدة أزرار تسمح لك بالمزيد من التحكم بالعرض، فالخيار
1584 فرز يرتب القائمة الحالية هجائيا.
1585 وبدون هذا الخيار ستظهر عناصر القائمة مرتبة حسب مكان وجودها في المستند.
1588 \begin_layout Standard
1595 يستخدم لتحديث القائمة (وهو غير مهم عادة).
1596 أما بقية الأزرار فتسمح بتغيير موقع عنصر معين في قسم داخل المستند.
1609 يسمحان بالتعديل للأعلى والأسفل مع المحافظة على المستوى، مثلا القسم
1613 يمكن نقله للأعلى ليصبح
1617 والقسم الذي قبله ستحول رقمه تلقائيا إلى
1621 ، وكذلك يمكن نقله للأسفل ليصبح
1638 فيسمحان برفع أو حفظ مستوى القسم للأعلى والاسفل ، مثلا القسم
1643 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1647 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1651 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1655 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1658 وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1666 ، وكذلك بالنسبة لزر الخفض، فعند النقر عليه سيخفض مستوى القسم
1671 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1675 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1679 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1683 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1686 في القسم السابق له، وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1697 \begin_layout Standard
1698 بالنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على قسم في نافذة الخلاصة يمكنك نسخ كامل القسم،
1702 \begin_layout Subsection
1704 \begin_inset Index idx
1707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1708 الاستكشاف ! الشريط الأفقي
1716 \begin_layout Standard
1717 لا يملك \SpecialChar LyX
1718 شريط أفقي لأن هيئة صفحات الخرج مثل A
1722 أقل عرضا من شاشة الحاسب الشخصي أو الحاسب المحمول.
1723 وسوف لن تواجه مشكلة في استعراض ملف الخرج إذا كان عرضه أكبر من عرض الشاشة.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1727 هناك بعض الحالات التي يكون فيها من الضروري وجود شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1731 \begin_layout Itemize
1733 يستخدم في الأجهزة اللوحية الصغيرة
1736 \begin_layout Itemize
1737 يتم تدوير الجهاز اللوحي °
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1753 \begin_inset space ~
1766 \begin_layout Itemize
1767 إنشاء عمليات رياضية بأسماء أوامر طويلة
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1771 ولهذه الحالات \SpecialChar LyX
1772 يملك آلية للتنقل داخل المستند.
1773 مثلا عند تقلص شاشة \SpecialChar LyX
1774 أثناء تحرير جدول عريض
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1782 يمكننا التنقل بين خلاليا الجدول باستخدام مفتاح الجدولة Tab في لوحة لمفاتح
1783 أو عن طريق أزرار الأسهم.
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1787 \begin_inset Float table
1793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1794 \begin_inset Caption Standard
1796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1799 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1803 اختبار شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1813 \begin_inset Tabular
1814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
1815 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
1816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
1841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1860 \begin_layout Section
1861 الإكمال التلقائي للكلمة
1862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1864 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1869 \begin_inset Index idx
1872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1879 \begin_inset Index idx
1882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1913 \begin_layout Standard
1917 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1919 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1920 is used to propose completions.
1923 \begin_layout Standard
1926 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
1929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
1934 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1950 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1954 \begin_inset space ~
1959 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1960 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1964 \begin_inset space ~
1970 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1971 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
1972 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
1973 if long completions should be abbreviated.
1976 \begin_layout Standard
1980 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
1981 completions available.
1986 key to accept a proposed completion.
1987 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1988 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1989 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1996 \begin_layout Standard
1999 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2000 ing options for text.
2001 The special math option
2005 enables characters to be composed.
2006 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2007 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2010 , you can then input the characters
2011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2022 to a formula to get it.
2023 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2024 of the math toolbar.
2025 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2029 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2030 's installation folder.
2031 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2040 \begin_layout Section
2041 مفاتيح التحكم الأساسية
2042 \begin_inset Index idx
2045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2052 \begin_inset Index idx
2055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2084 \begin_inset Index idx
2087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2120 \begin_layout Standard
2123 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2137 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2140 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2144 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2145 \begin_inset space ~
2149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2151 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2158 \begin_layout Standard
2164 \begin_inset space ~
2172 \begin_inset space ~
2193 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2197 \begin_layout Labeling
2198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2202 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2203 LatexCommand nomenclature
2205 description "مفتاح جدولة"
2213 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2215 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2222 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2229 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2233 , especially section
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2240 reference "subsec:Lists"
2246 If you are still confused, look in the
2251 \begin_inset Newline newline
2259 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2260 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2264 \begin_layout Labeling
2265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2269 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2270 LatexCommand nomenclature
2272 description "مفتاح الخروج"
2281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2288 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2289 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2292 \begin_layout Labeling
2293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2300 \begin_inset space ~
2304 \begin_inset space ~
2311 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2312 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2316 \begin_layout Standard
2317 توجد ثلاث مفاتح للتعديل:
2320 \begin_layout Labeling
2321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2340 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2341 LatexCommand nomenclature
2343 description "مفتاح التحكم"
2348 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2349 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2353 \begin_layout Itemize
2363 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2366 \begin_layout Itemize
2376 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2379 \begin_layout Itemize
2389 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2393 \begin_layout Labeling
2394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2413 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2414 LatexCommand nomenclature
2416 description "مفتاح علوي"
2421 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2422 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2425 \begin_layout Labeling
2426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "مفتاح Alt"
2453 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2454 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2455 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2461 \begin_inset Newline newline
2464 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2466 menu accelerator keys
2469 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2470 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2474 \begin_layout Standard
2477 For example, the sequence
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset space ~
2494 \begin_inset space ~
2502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2537 \begin_layout Standard
2544 manual lists all other things bound to the
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2555 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2557 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2558 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2559 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2560 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2561 The \SpecialChar LyX
2562 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2563 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2564 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2566 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2582 followed by a capital
2589 \begin_layout Chapter
2590 أساسيات ليك \SpecialChar LyX
2592 \begin_inset Index idx
2595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2604 \begin_layout Section
2606 \begin_inset Index idx
2609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2618 \begin_layout Subsection
2622 \begin_layout Standard
2625 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2626 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2627 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2628 numbering schemes, and so on.
2629 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2630 and format the title of your document differently.
2633 \begin_layout Standard
2640 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2641 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2642 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2643 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2644 picks one for you by default.
2645 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2648 \begin_layout Subsection
2650 \begin_inset Index idx
2653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2662 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2669 \begin_layout Standard
2670 تستطيع اختيار نوع المستند عن طريق
2672 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
2673 إعدادات\SpecialChar menuseparator
2677 \begin_inset Index idx
2680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2689 اختر نوع المستند الذي تريد، ثم اضبطه بالخيارات التي تريد.
2692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2696 \begin_layout Standard
2697 يحتوي ليك على أربعة أنواع من المستندات الأساسية.
2701 \begin_layout Description
2702 مقالة للمقالات البسيطة
2705 \begin_layout Description
2706 تقرير للتقارير البسيطة
2709 \begin_layout Description
2713 \begin_layout Description
2714 رسالة للرسائل بالأسلوب الأمريكي
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 هناك أنواع غير قياسية أخرى، والتي يستخدمها \SpecialChar LyX
2719 إذا كانت إذا كانت ملفات \SpecialChar LaTeX
2721 بها مركبة، على الرقم من أن معظم هذه الملفات يتم تركيبها بشكل افتراضي.
2722 وسنستعرض في الأسطر القادمة بعضا منها.
2723 أما إذا أردت مشاهدة قائمة كاملة بكل أنواع المستندات فستجدها في فصل أنواع
2724 المستندات الخاصة في كتيب خصائص إضافية:
2727 \begin_layout Description
2728 A&A مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية علم الفلك والفيزياء الفلكية.
2731 \begin_layout Description
2732 ACS مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية مجتمع الكيميائيين الأمريكيين.
2735 \begin_layout Description
2736 AGU مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية اتحاد الجيوفيزيائيين الأمريكيين.
2739 \begin_layout Description
2742 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2743 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2744 There are three article layouts available.
2745 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2746 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2747 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2748 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 sequential numbering
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2758 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2759 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2760 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Beamer نسق للعروض التقديمية، وهو الأفضل من بقية حزم العروض التقديمية.
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Broadway نسق كتابة الألعاب.
2769 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2770 ، لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Chess نسق للكتابة عن لعبة الشطرنج.
2778 \begin_layout Description
2780 \begin_inset space ~
2783 vitae نوع لإنشاء بيان السيرة
2786 \begin_layout Description
2787 Elsarticle نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Elsevier
2790 \begin_layout Description
2791 Foils يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 Hollywood يستخدم في كتابة سكربتات الأفلام الأمريكية.
2796 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2797 ، لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 IEEEtran نسق صحيفة معهد الإلكترونيات ومهندسي الإلكترونيات (IEEE)
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 IOP نسق صحيفة مجموعة نشر معهد الفيزياء
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Kluwer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Kluwer
2813 \begin_layout Description
2814 KOMA-Script بديل لنوع المستند القياسي، ويملك الكثير من المميزات العملية
2815 مما جعله الأكثر استخداما لإنتاج الكتب الكبيرة والرسائل العلمية.
2816 (مستخدم في هذا المستند.)
2819 \begin_layout Description
2820 Memoir بديل آخر للنوع القياسي
2823 \begin_layout Description
2824 Powerdot نسق للعروض التقديمية لكنه أقل دعما للصور من Beamer .
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 REVTeX يستخدم في نشر مقالات مجتمع الفيزياء الأمريكي (APS), والمعهد الأمريكي
2829 للفيزياء (AIP), ومجتمع البصريات الأمريكي (OSA).
2830 وهذا النوع غير متوافق تماما مع \SpecialChar LyX
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Slides نوع قديم يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2838 \begin_layout Description
2840 \begin_inset space ~
2843 Proceedings نسق صحيفة المجتمع الدولي لمهندسي البصريات (SPIE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 Springer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Springer
2850 \begin_layout Standard
2851 لم نقم بالدخول في تفاصيل كيفية استخدام أنواع المستندات السابقة.
2854 ويمكنك العثور على تفاصيل عن الأنواع غير القياسية في فصل أنواع المستندات
2855 غير القياسية في كتيب
2858 إلى هنا، سوف نكتفي ببعض الخصائص الأكثر شيوعا لهذه الأنواع.
2861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2865 \begin_layout Standard
2868 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2875 \begin_inset Index idx
2878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2897 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2898 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2900 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2908 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2913 , are highly specialized.
2915 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2916 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2917 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2918 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2919 by some document class.
2920 There are just too many of them.
2921 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2924 \begin_layout Standard
2927 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2935 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2936 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2937 document class for a new file.
2939 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2942 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2949 manual for information on how to install them.
2952 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2958 \begin_layout Standard
2961 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2962 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2963 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2964 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2965 class files to be used for dissertation
2966 s submitted to those universities.
2967 The \SpecialChar LyX
2968 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2970 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2974 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2980 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2987 name "subsec:Modules"
2992 \begin_inset Index idx
2995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3004 \begin_layout Standard
3007 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3008 chosen document class.
3009 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3010 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3022 \begin_inset Index idx
3025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3034 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3038 \begin_layout Standard
3041 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 packages or file format converters that are not always
3043 installed by default.
3045 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3046 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3047 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3048 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3050 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3051 file without the missing prerequisites.
3052 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3053 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3056 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3061 \begin_inset Index idx
3064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3077 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3080 \begin_layout Standard
3083 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3094 will advise you about these things.
3102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3106 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3111 \begin_inset Index idx
3114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3126 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3127 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3128 : They are intended to be used in
3129 a variety of different documents.
3130 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3131 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3132 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3133 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3134 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3136 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3154 manual for information on how to use it.
3157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 كل نوع من المستندات لها خصائص افتراضية.
3163 وهنا جدول بسيط يقارن بينها:
3166 \begin_layout Standard
3167 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3175 \begin_inset Tabular
3176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3177 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3182 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3188 \begin_inset space ~
3196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3464 \begin_layout Standard
3465 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3471 \begin_layout Standard
3474 You're probably also wondering what
3475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3479 \begin_inset space ~
3483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3487 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3488 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3493 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3498 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3508 headings, there are also
3516 headings, and so on.
3517 We will describe these headings fully in section
3520 \begin_inset space ~
3524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3526 reference "subsec:Headings"
3533 \begin_layout Subsection
3535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3537 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3542 \begin_inset Index idx
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3552 \begin_inset Index idx
3555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 \begin_layout Standard
3567 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3576 \begin_inset space ~
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3589 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3591 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3592 doesn't support special options you want to
3593 use for your document.
3594 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3595 -class and its options, you have to read
3599 \begin_layout Standard
3605 \begin_inset space ~
3612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3618 \begin_inset space ~
3623 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3624 You can choose between the following five options:
3627 \begin_layout Labeling
3628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3633 يستخدم أسلوب الصفحة الافتراضي لهذا المستند.
3636 \begin_layout Labeling
3637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3642 بدون ترقيم للصفحات أو عناوين.
3645 \begin_layout Labeling
3646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3654 \begin_layout Labeling
3655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3660 ترقيم للصفحات وفصول وأقسام مرقمة.
3661 وهذا يتوقف على الحد الأعلى من المستويات الذي يسمح به نوع المستوى المستخدم.
3664 \begin_layout Labeling
3665 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3670 هذا يسمح لك بتخصيص كامل للراس والتذييل إذا كنت ركبت حزمة
3675 \begin_inset Index idx
3678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
3685 والتي شرحت بشكل مفصل في القسم
3686 \begin_inset space ~
3690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3692 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3699 \begin_layout Standard
3702 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3705 \begin_inset space ~
3709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3711 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3718 \begin_layout Subsection
3720 \begin_inset Index idx
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3732 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3739 \begin_layout Standard
3740 يمكن أن تجد الخيارات التالية في
3743 \begin_inset space ~
3750 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
3754 \begin_inset Index idx
3757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3766 \begin_layout Labeling
3767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 \begin_inset space ~
3776 ما هو حجم ورق الطباعة المتاح.
3781 \begin_layout Itemize
3787 \begin_layout Itemize
3793 \begin_layout Itemize
3799 \begin_layout Itemize
3805 \begin_layout Itemize
3808 رسائل أمريكية, قانوني أمريكي, إداري أمريكي
3811 \begin_layout Itemize
3814 ياباني B0 – ياباني B6
3817 \begin_layout Itemize
3824 \begin_layout Labeling
3825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3831 To choose whether to output as
3842 \begin_layout Labeling
3843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3848 \begin_inset space ~
3853 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3854 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3857 \begin_layout Subsection
3859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3861 name "subsec:Margins"
3866 \begin_inset Index idx
3869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3876 \begin_inset Index idx
3879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3891 Paper margins are set in the menu
3893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3898 \begin_inset Index idx
3901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 \begin_layout Standard
3913 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3914 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3915 the paper format and the font size into account.
3918 \begin_layout Subsection
3922 \begin_layout Standard
3925 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3931 That includes the paragraph environments.
3932 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3933 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3934 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3936 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3945 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3947 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3948 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3949 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3952 \begin_layout Section
3953 بادئة الفقرة والفاصلة
3954 \begin_inset Index idx
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3966 \begin_layout Subsection
3968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3970 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3980 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3981 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3984 \begin_layout Standard
3987 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3988 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3989 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3990 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3994 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4000 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4001 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4002 language than English.
4004 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4007 \begin_layout Standard
4010 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4011 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4012 into \SpecialChar LyX
4014 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4017 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4019 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4020 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4021 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4030 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4031 goes to produce a printable file.
4036 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4038 gives you the ability globally to change
4042 these pre-coded spacings.
4043 We will explain more later.
4046 \begin_layout Subsection
4048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4050 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4055 \begin_inset Index idx
4058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 \begin_layout Standard
4077 \begin_inset space ~
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4097 \begin_inset Index idx
4100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4111 \begin_layout Subsection
4115 \begin_layout Standard
4118 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4128 dialog and toggle the
4131 \begin_inset space ~
4136 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4141 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4147 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4148 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4152 \begin_layout Standard
4155 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4156 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4159 \begin_layout Subsection
4161 \begin_inset Index idx
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4173 \begin_layout Standard
4178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4182 \begin_inset Index idx
4185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4194 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4198 \begin_inset space ~
4207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4210 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4217 \begin_inset Index idx
4220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4221 حزمة لتيك ! setspace
4228 installed to use this feature.
4233 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4237 \begin_inset space ~
4242 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4243 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4246 \begin_layout Section
4248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4250 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4255 \begin_inset Index idx
4258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4277 \begin_layout Subsection
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4284 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4297 } \SpecialChar ldots
4307 \begin_inset Newline newline
4310 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4312 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4313 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4314 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4323 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4326 \begin_layout Standard
4329 A paragraph environment is simply a
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4337 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4338 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4339 scheme, labels, and so on.
4340 Additionally, you can
4341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4348 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4349 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4350 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4351 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4353 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4355 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4361 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4364 \begin_inset Graphics
4365 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4373 at the left end of the toolbar.
4375 will change the environment of the
4379 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4380 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4381 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4385 \begin_layout Standard
4396 create a new paragraph using the
4400 paragraph environment.
4402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4409 because if you are in one of these environments:
4412 \begin_layout Itemize
4418 \begin_layout Itemize
4424 \begin_layout Itemize
4430 \begin_layout Itemize
4436 \begin_layout Itemize
4442 \begin_layout Itemize
4448 \begin_layout Itemize
4454 \begin_layout Standard
4458 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4462 , rather than resetting it to
4467 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4468 \begin_inset space ~
4472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4474 reference "sec:Nesting"
4481 \begin_layout Subsection
4485 \begin_layout Standard
4488 The default paragraph environment is
4493 It creates a plain paragraph.
4495 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4496 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4497 this manual) are in the
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4507 You can nest a paragraph using the
4511 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 \begin_layout Standard
4536 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4537 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4546 for thanks or contact information.
4547 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4548 places all of this on a separate page
4549 along with today's date.
4550 For other types of documents, the title
4551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4558 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4562 \begin_layout Standard
4566 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4580 Here's how you use them:
4583 \begin_layout Itemize
4586 Put the title of your document in the
4593 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 Put the author name in the
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4607 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4613 Note that using this environment is optional.
4614 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4615 will automatically insert today's date.
4616 If you don't want a date, use the option
4618 Suppress default date on front page
4622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4625 \begin_inset space ~
4633 \begin_layout Standard
4636 You can use footnotes to insert
4637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4644 or contact information.
4647 \begin_layout Subsection
4649 \begin_inset Index idx
4652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4661 name "subsec:Headings"
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4671 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4673 takes care of the numbering for you.
4676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4678 \begin_inset Index idx
4681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4682 عنونة الأقسام ! ترقيم
4690 \begin_layout Standard
4745 أنواع من العناوين الجانبية المرقمة.
4749 \begin_layout Enumerate
4755 \begin_layout Enumerate
4761 \begin_layout Enumerate
4767 \begin_layout Enumerate
4773 \begin_layout Enumerate
4779 \begin_layout Enumerate
4785 \begin_layout Enumerate
4791 \begin_layout Standard
4795 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4796 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4797 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4803 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4804 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4805 You group the book into chapters.
4807 does a similar grouping:
4810 \begin_layout Itemize
4811 الجزء ينقسم إلى فصول أو أقسام
4814 \begin_layout Itemize
4815 الفصل ينقسم إلى أقسام
4818 \begin_layout Itemize
4819 القسم ينقسم إلى أقسام فرعية
4822 \begin_layout Itemize
4823 القسم الفرعي ينقسم إلى أقسام تحت فرعية
4826 \begin_layout Itemize
4827 القسم تحت الفرعي ينقسم إلى فقرات
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4831 الفقرة تنقسم إلى فقرات فرعية
4834 \begin_layout Standard
4837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4846 Not all document types use the
4850 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4855 is the top-level heading.
4863 \begin_layout Standard
4870 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4871 labels it with its number,
4872 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4874 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4887 العناوين غير المرقمة
4888 \begin_inset Index idx
4891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4892 عنونة الأقسام ! غير مرقم
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4903 The unnumbered section headings have a
4904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4911 at the end of their name.
4912 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4913 the table of contents, see section
4914 \begin_inset space ~
4918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4931 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4941 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4942 in the Table of Contents.
4943 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4945 Just as certain classes start with
4959 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4969 This is something you can change.
4972 \begin_layout Standard
4977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4983 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4997 \begin_inset space ~
5001 \begin_inset space ~
5006 you will see two counters.
5011 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5012 numbers a section heading.
5013 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5019 \begin_inset Index idx
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5023 عنونة الأقسام ! عنوان قصير
5029 \begin_inset Argument 1
5032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5043 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5053 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5054 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5055 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5056 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5059 \begin_layout Standard
5063 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5064 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5065 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5066 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5071 \begin_inset space ~
5077 This will insert a box labeled
5078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5082 \begin_inset space ~
5086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5089 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5090 This also works for captions inside floats.
5091 There can only be one short title per title.
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5097 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5100 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5104 \begin_layout Standard
5107 The following information applies to all section headings:
5110 \begin_layout Itemize
5111 لا تستطيع التفريخ داخلها.
5114 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 لا تستطيع إضافة ملاحظة هامشية داخلها.
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 لا تستطيع إدراج معادلة رياضية فيها.
5122 \begin_layout Itemize
5123 لا تستطيع إدراج ملصق أو إشارة مرجعية لرقمها.
5126 \begin_layout Subsection
5130 \begin_layout Standard
5134 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5148 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5149 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5150 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5151 the text they contain.
5152 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5160 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5166 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5175 when you start a new paragraph.
5176 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5180 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5181 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5182 have to change back to the
5186 environment yourself.
5189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5190 الاقتباس والاقتباس الطويل
5191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5198 \begin_inset Index idx
5201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5213 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5214 time for the differences.
5223 are identical except for one difference:
5227 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5236 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5242 Here's an example of the
5257 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5259 See – no indentation!
5265 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5266 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5267 the other paragraph.
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5273 Here's another example, this time in the
5280 \begin_layout Quotation
5288 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5289 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5290 the first line, then
5294 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5298 you were quoting other text.
5301 \begin_layout Quotation
5304 Here's a new paragraph.
5305 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5306 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5312 As the examples show,
5316 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5317 They should put quotes in the
5322 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5326 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5331 \begin_inset Index idx
5334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5341 \begin_inset Index idx
5344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5366 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5374 \begin_inset Newline newline
5377 Which I did not rehearse!
5383 It could be much worse.
5384 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5386 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5387 indented a bit more than the first.
5388 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5396 \begin_inset Newline newline
5399 And make things look fine
5400 \begin_inset Newline newline
5408 arg "newline-insert newline"
5414 \begin_layout Standard
5421 does not indent both margins.
5422 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5423 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5428 arg "newline-insert newline"
5434 \begin_layout Subsection
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5459 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5469 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5470 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5479 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5480 lets you provide your own label.
5481 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5482 describing some general features of all four of them.
5485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5489 \begin_layout Standard
5492 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5494 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5495 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5504 reset the environment to
5508 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5509 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5510 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5516 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5522 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5532 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5533 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5534 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5536 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5537 you read all of section
5540 \begin_inset space ~
5544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5546 reference "sec:Nesting"
5553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5555 \begin_inset Index idx
5558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5574 \begin_layout Standard
5577 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5581 paragraph environment.
5582 It has the following properties:
5585 \begin_layout Itemize
5588 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5592 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5602 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5606 \begin_layout Itemize
5609 The items can have any length.
5611 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5612 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5619 \begin_layout Itemize
5626 environment inside another
5630 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5634 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5640 \begin_layout Itemize
5644 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5647 \begin_layout Itemize
5651 \begin_inset space ~
5655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5657 reference "sec:Nesting"
5661 for a full explanation of nesting.
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5668 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5677 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5683 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5684 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5690 The label for the first level
5694 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 The label for the second level is a dash.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 Back out to the third level.
5726 \begin_layout Itemize
5729 Back to the second level.
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5736 Back to the outermost level.
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5742 These are the default labels for an
5747 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5752 dialog in the submenu
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5769 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5776 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5777 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5779 \begin_inset space ~
5783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5785 reference "sec:Nesting"
5792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5794 \begin_inset Index idx
5797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5806 name "sec:Enumerate"
5813 \begin_layout Standard
5820 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5821 It has these properties:
5824 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5831 \begin_layout Enumerate
5834 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5838 \begin_layout Enumerate
5842 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5845 \begin_layout Enumerate
5852 environment resets the counter to one.
5855 \begin_layout Enumerate
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5874 Items can have any length.
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5889 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5907 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5909 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5910 labels the four different levels in an
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5920 The first level of an
5924 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5928 \begin_layout Enumerate
5931 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5935 \begin_layout Enumerate
5938 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5945 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5951 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5959 Back to the third level
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5966 Back to the second level.
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5973 Back to the outermost level.
5976 \begin_layout Standard
5979 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5983 environment, see section
5984 \begin_inset space ~
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5990 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5995 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6002 There is more to nesting
6006 environments than we've stated here.
6007 You should read section
6008 \begin_inset space ~
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6014 reference "sec:Nesting"
6018 to learn more about nesting.
6021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6023 \begin_inset Index idx
6026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6035 \begin_layout Standard
6038 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6042 list has no fixed label.
6043 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6052 of the first line as the label.
6056 \begin_layout Description
6057 مثال: هذا مثال على بيئة الوصف.
6060 \begin_layout Standard
6064 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6079 it is meant that the first usage of the
6083 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6085 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6095 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6105 \begin_inset space ~
6111 \begin_inset space ~
6115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6117 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6121 for more information.) Here is an example:
6124 \begin_layout Description
6128 \begin_inset space ~
6131 Example: This one shows how to use a
6134 \begin_inset space ~
6146 \begin_layout Description
6149 Usage: You should use the
6153 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6154 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6156 It's not a good idea to use a
6160 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6161 You're better off using
6173 paragraphs into them.
6176 \begin_layout Description
6179 Nesting: You can nest
6183 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6187 \begin_layout Standard
6190 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6191 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6192 them from the first line.
6195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6197 \begin_inset Index idx
6200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6216 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6217 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6232 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6234 Here are its properties:
6237 \begin_layout Labeling
6238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6242 \begin_inset space ~
6245 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6254 of each line as the item label.
6259 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6260 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6261 space as described above.
6264 \begin_layout Labeling
6265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6268 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6269 uses different margins for the item label and the
6270 body of the item text.
6271 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6272 label width plus a little extra space.
6276 \begin_layout Labeling
6277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6281 \begin_inset space ~
6284 width \SpecialChar LyX
6285 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6286 If the label width is larger, the label
6287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6294 into the first line.
6295 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6296 margin of the rest of the item text.
6299 \begin_layout Labeling
6300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6304 \begin_inset space ~
6307 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6312 environment has the same left margin.
6313 \begin_inset Newline newline
6316 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6326 dialog (toolbar button
6331 arg "layout-paragraph"
6340 \begin_inset space ~
6345 determines the default label width.
6346 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6355 multiple times instead.
6356 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6366 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6369 \begin_inset space ~
6374 every time you alter a label in a
6379 \begin_inset Newline newline
6382 The predefined default width is the length of
6383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6397 \begin_layout Standard
6404 list the same way as the
6408 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6414 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6418 \begin_layout Standard
6425 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6426 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6434 reference "sec:Nesting"
6438 to learn about nesting.
6441 \begin_layout Standard
6444 There is yet another feature of the
6448 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6449 left-justifies the item labels by
6451 You can use additional
6455 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6456 justifies the item label.
6461 are documented in section
6462 \begin_inset space ~
6466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6468 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6473 Here are some examples:
6476 \begin_layout Labeling
6477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6480 Left The default for
6487 \begin_layout Labeling
6488 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6491 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6498 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6501 \begin_layout Labeling
6502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6509 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6516 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6519 \begin_layout Subsection
6521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6523 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6528 \begin_inset Index idx
6531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6540 \begin_layout Standard
6543 The features described in this section require that the module
6545 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6547 is loaded in the document settings.
6548 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6556 \begin_inset Index idx
6559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6560 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
6568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6569 الترقيم العددي المخصص
6570 \begin_inset Index idx
6573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6582 \begin_layout Standard
6586 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6592 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6593 There you add the command
6596 \begin_layout Standard
6605 \begin_layout Standard
6623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6626 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6627 Code, look at section
6628 \begin_inset space ~
6632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6634 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6647 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6654 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6655 For capital Roman numerals replace
6667 in the command above.
6668 For Arabic numerals use
6676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6683 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6702 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6711 You can only number 26
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6715 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6726 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6727 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6730 \begin_layout Standard
6731 هنا قائمة بالترقيم المخصص:
6734 \begin_layout Enumerate
6735 \begin_inset Argument 1
6738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6764 \begin_layout Enumerate
6765 \begin_inset Argument 1
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6791 \begin_layout Enumerate
6796 \begin_layout Enumerate
6797 \begin_inset Argument 1
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_inset Argument 1
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6857 For this list these commands were used:
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_inset Newline newline
6880 \begin_inset Newline newline
6888 \begin_inset Newline newline
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6907 makes the label emphasized and
6916 \begin_layout Standard
6919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6929 lists until you change the definition.
6937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6939 \begin_inset Index idx
6942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 ترقيم ! عددي ! استئناف
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6954 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6957 \begin_layout Enumerate
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_inset Note Note
6983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 goes back to default numbering
6994 \begin_layout Enumerate
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7002 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7009 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7014 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7015 to indicate that it is a resumed
7016 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7017 , but in the output.
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7041 \begin_layout Standard
7044 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7046 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7047 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7048 of a normal enumeration.
7049 There, insert the command
7052 \begin_layout Standard
7059 \begin_layout Standard
7066 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7079 الترقيم العددي يبدأ بالقيمة المعطاة:
7082 \begin_layout Enumerate
7083 \begin_inset Argument 1
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 الترقيم العددي يبدأ من 4
7105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7107 \begin_inset Index idx
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7122 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7124 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7127 \begin_layout Itemize
7131 \begin_layout Itemize
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7138 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7140 Add there the command
7144 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7147 \begin_layout Itemize
7148 \begin_inset Argument 1
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 \begin_layout Itemize
7174 \begin_layout Itemize
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7181 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7201 For more information see its documentation
7204 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7217 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7219 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7220 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7224 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7227 \begin_layout Enumerate
7228 \begin_inset Argument 1
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7252 \begin_layout Enumerate
7253 مع عكس المسافة البادئة
7256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7258 \begin_inset Index idx
7261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7273 You can also change the style of description lists.
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7287 changes the description label font, the command
7290 \begin_layout Standard
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7300 sets the list style.
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7306 An example where the command
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7315 itshape, style=nextline
7318 \begin_layout Standard
7324 \begin_layout Description
7328 \begin_inset space ~
7332 \begin_inset Argument 1
7335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7343 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7345 itshape, style=nextline
7355 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7356 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7360 \begin_layout Description
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7367 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7368 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7369 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7372 \begin_layout Standard
7375 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7383 \begin_inset Index idx
7386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7387 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7395 For more information see its documentation
7398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7408 \begin_layout Subsection
7410 \begin_inset Index idx
7413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 العنوان والعنوان الأيمن: نظرة عامة
7426 \begin_layout Standard
7429 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7430 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7438 \begin_inset space ~
7444 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7445 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7446 gags on the document.
7447 In contrast, you can use the
7454 \begin_inset space ~
7459 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7460 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7467 Of course, you're not limited to using
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7489 some European academic papers.
7492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7496 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7510 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7511 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7515 \begin_inset space ~
7520 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7521 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7522 Here's an example of each:
7525 \begin_layout Right Address
7527 \begin_inset Newline newline
7531 \begin_inset Newline newline
7535 \begin_inset Newline newline
7541 \begin_layout Standard
7547 \begin_inset space ~
7553 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7555 the largest block of text on a single line.
7556 Here's an example of the
7563 \begin_layout Address
7565 \begin_inset Newline newline
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_layout Standard
7578 As you can see, both
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7590 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7595 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7596 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7602 This makes sense, since
7610 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7611 Thus, you have to use
7620 arg "newline-insert newline"
7627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7628 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7634 \begin_inset space ~
7639 ) to start a new line in an
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7654 \begin_layout Subsection
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7661 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7662 or list of references.
7664 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7669 \begin_inset Index idx
7672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7683 \begin_layout Standard
7690 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7691 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7692 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7693 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7707 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7708 The book document classes ignores the
7712 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7716 in a letter document class.
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7726 environment does several things for you.
7727 First, it puts the centered label
7728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7736 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7738 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7739 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7740 the subsequent text.
7741 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7743 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7750 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7754 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7755 The new paragraph will still be in the
7760 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7761 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 \begin_inset Float figure
7770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7772 \begin_inset Graphics
7773 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7786 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7806 We would love to demonstrate the
7810 environment, but since this document is in the
7811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7818 class, we can't do this.
7819 We inserted it therefore as figure
7820 \begin_inset space ~
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7826 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 If you have never heard of an
7832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7839 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7844 \begin_inset Index idx
7847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7856 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7870 environment is used to list references.
7871 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7872 only use it at the end of the document.
7884 \begin_layout Standard
7887 When you first open a
7891 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7892 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 depending on the document class.
7909 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7910 Each paragraph of the
7914 environment is a bibliography entry.
7919 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7920 Each new paragraph is still in the
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7930 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7931 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7933 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7935 handling, have a look at section
7938 \begin_inset space ~
7942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7944 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7951 \begin_layout Subsection
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7959 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7960 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7964 كود - ليك \SpecialChar LyX
7966 \begin_inset Index idx
7969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7978 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7985 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8019 \begin_inset space ~
8024 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8042 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8045 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8050 arg "newline-insert newline"
8069 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8070 So, when you finish using the
8075 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8076 Also, you can nest the
8081 environment inside of others.
8084 \begin_layout Standard
8087 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8090 \begin_layout Itemize
8098 arg "newline-insert newline"
8103 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8108 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8136 arg "newline-insert newline"
8150 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8162 You must put at least one
8166 in any line you want blank.
8167 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8171 \begin_layout Itemize
8174 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8178 since that will insert
8183 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8188 arg "self-insert \""
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8204 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8216 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8222 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8225 printf("Hello World!
8230 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8236 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8242 \begin_layout Standard
8245 This is just the standard
8246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8257 \begin_layout Standard
8264 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8266 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8267 as if you used a typewriter
8270 \begin_inset Index idx
8273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8281 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8284 Program Code Listings
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8299 \begin_inset Index idx
8302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8311 \begin_layout Standard
8318 environment is similar to the
8323 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8324 computer console text.
8329 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8343 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8344 you can have empty lines.
8357 \begin_layout Itemize
8360 have a certain language and a text style
8363 \begin_layout Itemize
8366 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8367 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8368 and \SpecialChar TeX
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8375 Because of these properties
8379 works like a typewriter.
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim
8387 \begin_layout Verbatim
8390 The following 2 lines are empty:
8393 \begin_layout Verbatim
8397 \begin_layout Verbatim
8401 \begin_layout Verbatim
8402 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8407 \begin_layout Standard
8414 environment is identical to
8418 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8419 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8426 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8430 \begin_layout Section
8432 \begin_inset Index idx
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8451 \begin_layout Subsection
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8459 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8461 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8463 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8465 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8477 \begin_layout Enumerate
8481 \begin_layout Enumerate
8486 \begin_layout Enumerate
8487 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #1
8490 \begin_layout Enumerate
8491 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #2
8495 \begin_layout Enumerate
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8502 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8503 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8507 \begin_inset space ~
8511 \begin_inset space ~
8519 \begin_inset space ~
8523 \begin_inset space ~
8528 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8530 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8535 arg "depth-increment"
8545 arg "depth-decrement"
8563 arg "depth-increment"
8573 arg "depth-decrement"
8579 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8580 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8584 \begin_layout Standard
8587 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8588 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8589 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8590 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8591 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8594 \begin_layout Standard
8597 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8599 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8601 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8604 \begin_layout Subsection
8605 ما الذي تستطيع تفريخه وما لا تستطيع
8608 \begin_layout Standard
8611 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8612 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8615 \begin_layout Standard
8618 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8619 than a simple yes or no.
8620 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 Completely unnestable
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8643 \begin_layout Standard
8646 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8647 environments have them:
8650 \begin_layout Description
8654 \begin_inset space ~
8662 \begin_inset space ~
8667 للتفريخ لا يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8668 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Description
8705 \begin_inset space ~
8708 كامل يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8709 ويمكن التفريخ داخله.
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_layout Description
8776 \begin_inset space ~
8779 طفيلي يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
8780 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8790 \begin_layout Itemize
8796 \begin_layout Itemize
8802 \begin_layout Itemize
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8826 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8850 \begin_layout Itemize
8856 \begin_layout Itemize
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8872 \begin_layout Itemize
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8882 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8891 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8901 \begin_inset space ~
8904 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8905 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8906 nested section headings violate this.
8914 \begin_layout Subsection
8915 تفريخ أشياء أخرى: الجداول، الرياضيات، التعويم، إلخ.
8916 \begin_inset Index idx
8919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8920 تفريخ ! الجداول إلخ.
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8931 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8932 affected by nesting anyhow.
8936 \begin_layout Itemize
8940 \begin_layout Itemize
8944 \begin_layout Itemize
8948 \begin_layout Standard
8952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 Figures and tables in
8965 are not affected by this.
8970 Have a look at section
8973 \begin_inset space ~
8977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8979 reference "sec:Floats"
8985 for more information about
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8996 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8997 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9001 \begin_layout Standard
9004 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9012 of its own, it behaves just like a
9013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9020 paragraph environment.
9021 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9028 Here's an example with a table:
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 This is (a) and it's nested.
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9054 \begin_inset Tabular
9055 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9056 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9057 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9058 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 \begin_layout Standard
9107 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9114 \begin_layout Enumerate
9118 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9122 \begin_layout Enumerate
9128 \begin_layout Standard
9131 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9134 \begin_layout Enumerate
9141 \begin_layout Enumerate
9144 This is (a) and it's nested.
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9157 \begin_inset Tabular
9158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9209 \begin_layout Standard
9210 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9216 \begin_layout Enumerate
9225 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9228 \begin_layout Enumerate
9234 \begin_layout Standard
9237 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9241 \begin_layout Standard
9244 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9247 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9250 \begin_layout Enumerate
9257 \begin_layout Enumerate
9260 This is (a) and it's nested.
9263 \begin_layout Standard
9264 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9270 \begin_layout Standard
9272 \begin_inset Tabular
9273 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9274 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9352 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9358 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9359 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9363 \begin_layout Subsection
9364 الاستخدام والميزات العامة
9367 \begin_layout Standard
9370 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9371 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9380 is the innermost possible depth.
9381 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9387 level #1 – outermost
9391 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 \begin_layout Enumerate
9405 \begin_layout Enumerate
9412 \begin_layout Itemize
9419 \begin_layout Itemize
9430 \begin_layout Standard
9433 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9434 both of them in the example.
9435 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9445 For example, if we tried to nest another
9450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9457 , we would get errors.
9460 \begin_layout Subsection
9462 \begin_inset Index idx
9465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9477 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9478 We have several examples of nested environments.
9479 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9484 مثال 1: الطية السادسة والتفريخ المختلط
9487 \begin_layout Labeling
9488 \labelwidthstring MMM
9491 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9500 \begin_layout Labeling
9501 \labelwidthstring MMM
9504 #2-a This is level #2.
9505 We created it by using
9510 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9520 arg "depth-increment"
9529 \begin_layout Labeling
9530 \labelwidthstring MMM
9533 #3-a This is level #3.
9534 This time, we just enter
9543 arg "depth-increment"
9549 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9565 arg "depth-increment"
9574 \begin_layout Standard
9581 environment, nested inside of
9582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9590 So, it's at level #4.
9591 We did this by entering
9596 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-increment"
9611 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9616 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9632 \begin_layout Standard
9639 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9644 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #4-a This is level #4.
9662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9667 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9672 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9676 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9681 keep nesting things inside
9682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9693 \begin_layout Labeling
9694 \labelwidthstring MMM
9697 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9702 \begin_layout Labeling
9703 \labelwidthstring MMM
9706 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9707 and this is level #6.
9708 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9712 \begin_layout Labeling
9713 \labelwidthstring MMM
9716 #5-b Back to level #5.
9722 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9741 \begin_layout Labeling
9742 \labelwidthstring MMM
9750 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9760 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 , we're back at level #4.
9769 \begin_layout Labeling
9770 \labelwidthstring MMM
9773 #3-b Back to level #3.
9774 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9778 \begin_layout Labeling
9779 \labelwidthstring MMM
9782 #2-b Back to level #2.
9787 \begin_layout Labeling
9788 \labelwidthstring MMM
9791 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9792 After this sentence, we will enter
9796 and change the paragraph environment back to
9803 \begin_layout Standard
9806 We could have also used the
9822 environment in place of the
9827 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9834 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9837 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9840 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9853 arg "depth-increment"
9859 \begin_inset Newline newline
9862 which, we will change to the
9870 \begin_layout Enumerate
9877 environment, at level #2.
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9883 Notice how the nested
9887 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9891 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9895 \begin_layout Standard
9898 We ended this example by entering
9903 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9907 and reset the nesting depth by using
9912 arg "depth-decrement"
9920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9921 مثال 3: الملصقات، المستويات، وبيئة التعداد النقطي والرقمي
9922 \begin_inset Argument 1
9925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9928 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9936 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 This is level #1, in an
9943 paragraph environment.
9944 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9957 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 arg "depth-increment"
9973 Now, what happens if we nest an
9977 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9978 label be? An asterisk?
9982 \begin_layout Itemize
9994 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9995 So, its label is a bullet.
9996 (We got here by using
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 arg "depth-increment"
10016 , then changing the environment to
10024 \begin_layout Itemize
10027 Here's level #4, produced using
10032 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10042 arg "depth-increment"
10048 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10057 to get to level #5.
10058 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10063 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10067 , because we are in the
10075 environment (that is, it is an
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10098 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10102 \begin_layout Enumerate
10105 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10115 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10118 \begin_layout Enumerate
10126 arg "depth-decrement"
10131 to decrease the depth after the next
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10143 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10152 \begin_layout Enumerate
10156 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10157 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10161 \begin_layout Enumerate
10164 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10173 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10178 reset the counter for the label.
10182 \begin_layout Enumerate
10190 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10196 arg "depth-decrement"
10201 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10202 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10203 into the twofold-nested
10211 \begin_layout Enumerate
10214 The same thing happens if we do another
10219 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10225 arg "depth-decrement"
10230 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10233 \begin_layout Standard
10236 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10241 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10252 The number of other
10256 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10263 The same rule applies for the
10267 environment, as well.
10270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10271 مثال 4: الذهاب للجنون
10274 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10278 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10279 the same detail with how we did it.
10288 \begin_layout Standard
10299 arg "depth-increment"
10307 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10308 the example in parentheses someplace.
10309 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10310 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10311 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10315 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10326 \begin_layout Verse
10329 Now we will add verse.
10330 \begin_inset Newline newline
10333 It will get much worse.
10334 \begin_inset Newline newline
10345 arg "depth-increment"
10356 \begin_layout Verse
10359 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10372 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10380 \begin_layout Verse
10383 Here comes a table:
10387 \begin_layout Standard
10390 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10396 \begin_layout Standard
10398 \begin_inset Tabular
10399 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10400 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10401 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10451 \begin_layout Verse
10459 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10471 arg "depth-increment"
10481 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10488 \begin_inset Newline newline
10497 arg "depth-decrement"
10506 \begin_layout Enumerate
10513 : level #1) This is another item.
10514 Note that selecting a
10518 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10519 3 times to put the table inside the
10527 \begin_layout Quotation
10530 We're now ending the
10534 list and changing to
10539 We're still at level #1.
10540 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10541 The next set of paragraphs is a
10542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10549 We will nest both the
10556 \begin_inset space ~
10561 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10565 for the letter body.
10571 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10576 to preserve the depth.
10577 Remember that you need to use
10582 arg "newline-insert newline"
10587 to create multiple lines inside the
10594 \begin_inset space ~
10604 \begin_layout Right Address
10608 \begin_inset Newline newline
10611 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10612 \begin_inset Newline newline
10618 \begin_layout Address
10622 \begin_inset space ~
10628 \begin_layout Quotation
10631 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10635 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10636 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10637 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10638 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10639 as soon as possible.
10640 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10643 \begin_layout Quotation
10646 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10647 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10648 with your order, along with payment.
10651 \begin_layout Quotation
10654 We thank you again for your patience.
10657 \begin_layout Address
10661 \begin_inset Newline newline
10668 \begin_layout Quotation
10671 That ends that example!
10674 \begin_layout Standard
10677 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10678 gives you a lot of power with just
10680 We could have easily nested an
10701 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10704 \begin_layout Subsection
10706 \begin_inset Index idx
10709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10718 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10725 \begin_layout Standard
10728 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10730 For example you need two different enumerations:
10733 \begin_layout Enumerate
10738 \begin_layout Enumerate
10743 \begin_layout Enumerate
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 \begin_inset Separator plain
10754 \begin_layout Itemize
10760 \begin_layout Standard
10761 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10767 \begin_layout Enumerate
10771 \begin_layout Enumerate
10775 \begin_layout Enumerate
10779 \begin_layout Standard
10782 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10783 list item and use the menu
10785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10786 Separated <Name> Above
10790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10791 Separated <Name> Below
10794 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10795 ) and before or behind it the
10797 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10800 \begin_layout Standard
10803 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10804 (red arrow in LyX).
10805 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10806 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10812 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10817 arg "paragraph-break"
10826 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10829 \begin_layout Section
10830 المسافات، ترقيم الصفحات والأسطر الفاصلة
10831 \begin_inset Index idx
10834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10846 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10847 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10849 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10850 be broken at the end of a line.
10851 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10855 \begin_layout Subsection
10857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10859 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10864 \begin_inset Index idx
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10876 \begin_layout Standard
10879 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10880 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10881 ) not to break the line at
10883 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10886 \begin_layout Quote
10889 Further documentation is given in section
10890 \begin_inset Newline newline
10896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10898 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10905 \begin_layout Standard
10908 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10925 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10936 A protected space is set with
10938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10939 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10951 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10959 \begin_layout Subsection
10961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10963 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10968 \begin_inset Index idx
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 \begin_layout Standard
10983 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10986 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10990 The length units are listed in Appendix
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10999 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11007 مسافة في وسط الكلمة
11008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11010 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11015 \begin_inset Index idx
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11019 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
11027 \begin_layout Standard
11030 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11031 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11032 at the ends of sentences.
11033 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11034 automatically takes care about this.
11035 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11036 followed by a period; see section
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11052 To insert a normal space, select
11054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11055 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11067 arg "space-insert normal"
11075 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11084 \begin_inset Index idx
11087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_layout Standard
11100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11107 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11116 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11117 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11118 inside abbreviations:
11121 \begin_layout Quote
11125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11129 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11132 \begin_layout Standard
11135 or between values and units.
11136 Compare for example this:
11137 \begin_inset Newline newline
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11145 \begin_inset Newline newline
11148 10 kg (normal space
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11154 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11157 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11159 \begin_inset space ~
11169 arg "space-insert thin"
11177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11181 \begin_layout Standard
11182 يمكنك إدراج أنواع المسافات التالية:
11185 \begin_layout Description
11189 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_inset space ~
11196 space A line with a
11197 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11201 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11205 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11208 negative thin space between the arrows.
11211 \begin_layout Description
11215 \begin_inset space ~
11219 \begin_inset space ~
11222 space A line with a
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11227 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11231 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11234 negative medium space between the arrows.
11237 \begin_layout Description
11241 \begin_inset space ~
11245 \begin_inset space ~
11248 space A line with a
11249 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11253 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11257 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11260 negative thick space between the arrows.
11263 \begin_layout Description
11267 \begin_inset space ~
11271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11279 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11283 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11287 \begin_inset space ~
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11294 em) space between the arrows.
11297 \begin_layout Description
11301 \begin_inset space ~
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11309 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11313 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11317 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11321 \begin_inset space ~
11325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 em) space between the arrows.
11331 \begin_layout Description
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11347 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11351 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11355 \begin_inset space ~
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11362 em) space between the arrows.
11365 \begin_layout Description
11369 \begin_inset space ~
11373 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11377 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11382 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11389 cm space between the arrows.
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11398 \begin_inset space ~
11402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11404 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11410 lists the different space sizes.
11413 \begin_layout Standard
11414 \begin_inset Float table
11419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11425 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11429 عرض المسافات الأفقية المختلفة.
11437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 \begin_inset Tabular
11440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11441 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11559 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11718 \begin_inset Index idx
11721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 \begin_layout Standard
11733 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11734 feature for adding extra space
11735 in a uniform fashion.
11736 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11737 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11738 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11739 equally between themselves.
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11745 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11748 \begin_layout Quote
11750 هذا في الاتجاه اليسار
11751 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11754 هذا في الاتجاه اليمين
11757 \begin_layout Quote
11760 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11770 \begin_layout Quote
11773 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11777 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11781 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11787 \begin_layout Standard
11790 That was an example in the
11796 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11800 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11804 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11807 is one in a standard paragraph.
11808 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11812 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11818 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11821 \begin_inset space ~
11826 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11829 \begin_layout Standard
11831 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11843 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11847 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_layout Standard
11855 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11865 \begin_layout Standard
11867 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11879 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11883 \begin_inset space ~
11889 \begin_layout Standard
11891 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11895 \begin_inset space ~
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11913 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11917 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11919 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11920 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11924 option in the space dialog.
11932 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11936 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11941 \begin_inset Index idx
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11956 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11957 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11966 What is correct English?:
11967 \begin_inset Newline newline
11971 \begin_inset Newline newline
11975 \begin_inset space ~
11978 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11979 \begin_inset Newline newline
11983 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11996 \begin_inset Newline newline
12000 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12015 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12021 \begin_layout Standard
12025 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12030 \begin_inset space ~
12034 \begin_inset space ~
12038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12042 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12045 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12049 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12055 \begin_inset space ~
12059 \begin_inset space ~
12063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12066 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12075 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12076 That is why it is named
12077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12085 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12086 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12090 \begin_layout Subsection
12092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12094 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12099 \begin_inset Index idx
12102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12114 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 There you find the following sizes:
12128 \begin_layout Standard
12142 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12143 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12148 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12151 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12153 \begin_inset space ~
12160 \begin_inset Index idx
12163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 for the paragraph separation.
12172 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12191 \begin_inset Index idx
12194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12202 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12203 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12208 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12209 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12218 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12228 s are described in section
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12235 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12244 If there are several
12248 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12249 You can therefore use
12253 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12262 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12271 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12281 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12292 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12293 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12305 \begin_layout Subsection
12307 \begin_inset Index idx
12310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12319 \begin_layout Standard
12320 يمكنك تغيير محاذاة الفقرة عن طريق
12322 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
12328 arg "layout-paragraph"
12332 توجد خمسة احتمالات:
12335 \begin_layout Itemize
12343 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12349 \begin_layout Itemize
12357 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12363 \begin_layout Itemize
12371 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12377 \begin_layout Itemize
12385 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12391 \begin_layout Itemize
12399 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12408 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12409 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12410 the left and right margins.
12411 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12416 هذه الفقرة محاذاة يمين
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12424 \begin_layout Standard
12431 \begin_layout Subsection
12433 \begin_inset Index idx
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12445 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12452 \begin_layout Standard
12455 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12456 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12457 force a page break where you want one.
12458 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12459 is good at page breaking.
12460 Only if you use a lot of
12464 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12465 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12468 \begin_layout Standard
12471 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12472 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12476 have to change the page breaking.
12479 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12484 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12487 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12495 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12498 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12505 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12507 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12508 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12511 \begin_layout Standard
12514 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12515 at the top of a page.
12516 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12518 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12519 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12520 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12526 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12532 to learn more about
12539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12543 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12563 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12564 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12565 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12566 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12567 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12570 \begin_layout Standard
12573 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12576 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12584 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12587 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 \begin_inset space ~
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12598 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12599 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12602 \begin_layout Subsection
12604 \begin_inset Index idx
12607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12616 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12623 \begin_layout Standard
12626 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12628 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12631 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset space ~
12647 arg "newline-insert newline"
12653 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12662 \begin_inset space ~
12672 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12677 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12679 This is useful to avoid
12680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12687 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12693 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12694 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12696 very good at line breaking.
12697 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12698 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12701 \begin_inset space ~
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12707 reference "sec:Quote"
12712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12714 reference "sec:Verse"
12723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12725 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12734 \begin_layout Subsection
12736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12738 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12759 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12770 \begin_layout Standard
12776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12777 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12779 \begin_inset space ~
12784 you can insert horizontal lines.
12785 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12786 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12787 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12794 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12805 \begin_layout Section
12809 \begin_layout Standard
12812 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12813 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12814 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12824 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12830 for information on how this is done.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12836 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12841 dialog via the menu
12843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12844 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12850 \begin_layout Standard
12853 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12862 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12863 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12865 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12873 \begin_layout Section
12875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12877 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12884 \begin_layout Subsection
12886 \begin_inset Index idx
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12898 \begin_layout Standard
12901 There are two types of fonts:
12904 \begin_layout Description
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset Index idx
12913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12921 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12926 characters) in the font.
12927 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12928 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12929 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12930 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12931 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12932 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12933 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12934 \begin_inset Newline newline
12937 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12938 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12939 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12940 sizes than at small ones.
12941 \begin_inset Newline newline
12955 \begin_inset space ~
12963 \begin_layout Description
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12969 \begin_inset Index idx
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12980 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12981 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12982 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12983 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12984 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12985 image manipulation program.
12986 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12987 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12991 pixels high up to 34
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12995 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12996 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12997 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12999 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13000 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13001 \begin_inset Newline newline
13004 Bitmap fonts are named
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13012 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13015 \begin_layout Standard
13018 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13019 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13020 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13021 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13022 use scalable fonts.
13025 \begin_layout Standard
13028 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13031 \begin_layout Standard
13034 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13035 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13036 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13037 font to emphasize text, you use an
13038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13046 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13048 In \SpecialChar LyX
13049 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13053 \begin_layout Subsection
13054 دعم الخطوط في لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
13056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13058 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13065 \begin_layout Standard
13068 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13069 used its own fonts.
13070 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13071 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13074 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13075 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13076 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13077 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13078 to a word processor.
13079 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13080 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13081 files are very portable across
13082 different machines.
13083 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13084 has increased a lot
13085 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13088 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13096 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13101 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13102 code in the document
13103 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13106 \begin_layout Standard
13109 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13110 engines that are also able directly
13111 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13113 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13115 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13117 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13118 that is installed on your system.
13119 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13122 \begin_layout Standard
13125 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13134 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13135 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13143 \begin_layout Subsection
13145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13147 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13152 \begin_inset Index idx
13155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13162 \begin_inset Index idx
13165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13174 \begin_layout Standard
13177 You can set the document fonts in the
13179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13184 \begin_inset Index idx
13187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13200 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13201 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13213 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13218 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13228 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13229 This requires that you use
13241 as the output format, i.
13242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13246 \begin_inset space \space{}
13249 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13250 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13251 installed (see section
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13260 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13267 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13269 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13270 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13272 \begin_inset space ~
13275 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13276 cannot determine the family.
13277 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13278 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13281 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13287 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13288 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13293 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13299 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13300 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
13303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13340 European Computer Modern
13343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13351 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13354 \begin_layout Standard
13361 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13362 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13369 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13377 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13383 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13384 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13387 \begin_layout Itemize
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13398 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13411 \begin_inset space ~
13416 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13417 community in order to replace
13421 as the default font.
13422 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13423 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13426 \begin_inset space ~
13439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13442 One difference is improved kerning.
13450 \begin_layout Itemize
13453 If you do not like the look of
13461 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13466 \begin_inset space ~
13472 \begin_inset space ~
13482 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13483 \begin_inset space ~
13486 serif and typewriter fonts,
13490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13493 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13500 \begin_inset space ~
13509 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13514 \begin_inset space \space{}
13522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13526 \begin_inset space \space{}
13532 \begin_inset space ~
13540 \begin_inset space ~
13550 but you can also select your own.
13551 \begin_inset Newline newline
13554 The differences between roman,
13557 \begin_inset space ~
13566 fonts are explained in section
13569 \begin_inset space ~
13573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13575 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13582 \begin_inset Newline newline
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13593 was originally designed for newspapers.
13594 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13595 into the small newspaper columns.
13599 \begin_inset space ~
13604 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13610 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13623 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13628 depends on the class you are using.
13629 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13632 \begin_layout Standard
13635 Note that the font size is the
13640 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13641 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13642 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13643 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13652 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13655 \begin_inset space ~
13659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13661 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13668 \begin_layout Standard
13674 \begin_inset space ~
13679 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13684 serif or typewriter.
13689 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13699 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13702 \begin_layout Standard
13709 LaTeX font encoding
13711 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13712 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13720 \begin_inset Index idx
13723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13724 حزمة لتيك ! fontenc
13734 \begin_inset space ~
13738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13740 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13747 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13748 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13758 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13760 Use Old Style Figures
13764 Use True Small Caps
13767 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13770 Use Old Style Figures
13772 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13774 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13782 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13786 Use True Small Caps
13788 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13789 of scaled capitals.
13790 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13791 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13801 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13802 a font to display the script characters.
13806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13809 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13817 \begin_inset Index idx
13820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13828 So this has no effect for the document language
13844 \begin_layout Standard
13849 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13851 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13852 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13859 \begin_inset Index idx
13862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13863 حزمة لتيك ! microtype
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13876 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13878 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13885 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13886 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13892 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13893 \begin_inset space ~
13897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13899 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13912 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13925 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13930 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13931 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13933 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13938 dialog, see section
13939 \begin_inset space ~
13943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13945 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13957 \begin_layout Subsection
13961 \begin_layout Standard
13964 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13965 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13967 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13968 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13969 choose a math font in the dialog
13971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13976 \begin_inset Index idx
13979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13988 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13989 automatically selects a math font.
13990 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13991 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14000 \begin_inset space ~
14006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14011 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14012 document font is available.
14015 \begin_layout Standard
14018 Note that the math font will not be used for
14022 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14032 or by the insertion of the command
14039 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14040 \begin_inset space ~
14044 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14045 while the math characters do not.
14047 \begin_inset space ~
14050 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14053 \begin_inset space ~
14061 \begin_inset space ~
14066 in the document font settings.
14069 \begin_layout Standard
14072 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14073 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14074 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14075 font (in most cases
14076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14082 \begin_inset space ~
14088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14092 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14100 \begin_inset space ~
14106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14112 \begin_layout Subsection
14113 استخدام انساق محارف مختلفة
14114 \begin_inset Index idx
14117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14124 \begin_inset Index idx
14127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14136 \begin_layout Standard
14139 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14140 automatically changes the character style for certain
14141 paragraph environments.
14143 supports two character styles,
14152 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
14156 \begin_layout Standard
14163 style, do one of the following:
14166 \begin_layout Itemize
14167 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14176 \begin_layout Itemize
14186 \begin_layout Standard
14189 These commands are all toggles.
14194 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14197 \begin_layout Standard
14200 One typically uses the
14204 style for proper names.
14206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14213 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14221 \begin_layout Standard
14224 A more widely used character style is the
14229 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14236 \begin_layout Itemize
14237 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14246 \begin_layout Itemize
14256 \begin_layout Standard
14263 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14265 use a different font.
14268 \begin_layout Standard
14271 We've been using the
14275 style all over the place in this document.
14276 Here's one more example:
14279 \begin_layout Quotation
14283 Do not overuse character styles!
14286 \begin_layout Standard
14289 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14290 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14291 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14292 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14296 \begin_layout Standard
14299 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
14311 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14313 \begin_inset space ~
14316 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14324 arg "dialog-show character"
14332 \begin_layout Subsection
14333 الضبط الدقيق من نافذة أسلوب النص
14334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14336 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14341 \begin_inset Index idx
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14353 \begin_layout Standard
14356 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14358 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14359 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14360 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14361 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14362 from ordinary dialog.
14365 \begin_layout Standard
14368 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14369 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14370 \begin_inset Newline newline
14373 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14374 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14377 \begin_layout Standard
14380 To use custom character styles, open the
14382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14384 \begin_inset space ~
14387 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14390 dialog or press the toolbar button
14395 arg "dialog-show character"
14401 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14402 font property that you can choose.
14403 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14406 \begin_inset space ~
14411 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14416 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14417 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14418 environments all at once.
14421 \begin_layout Standard
14424 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14427 \begin_inset space ~
14439 \begin_layout Labeling
14440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14455 The possible options are:
14459 \begin_layout Labeling
14460 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14466 This is the Roman font family.
14467 Normally a serif font.
14468 It's also the default family.
14482 \begin_layout Labeling
14483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14488 \begin_inset space ~
14495 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14511 \begin_layout Labeling
14512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14520 This is the Typewriter font family.
14528 arg "font-typewriter"
14538 \begin_layout Labeling
14539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14545 This corresponds to the print weight.
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 This is the Medium font series.
14558 It's also the default series.
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 This is the Bold font series.
14587 \begin_layout Labeling
14588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14594 As the name implies.
14599 \begin_layout Labeling
14600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This is the Upright font shape.
14607 It's also the default shape.
14610 \begin_layout Labeling
14611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14626 s the Italic font shape
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14641 This is the Slanted font shape
14643 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14644 , this is different from italic).
14647 \begin_layout Labeling
14648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 \begin_inset space ~
14660 This is the Small caps font shape
14667 \begin_layout Labeling
14668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Alters the text color.
14675 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14679 \begin_inset space ~
14684 , which means that the document default color set in
14686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14687 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14693 \begin_inset space ~
14698 is used, you can choose between
14777 \begin_inset Index idx
14780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14789 \begin_layout Labeling
14790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14796 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14797 the language of the document.
14798 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14799 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14801 \begin_inset Newline newline
14804 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14806 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14807 When using the spell checking (see section
14810 \begin_inset space ~
14814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14816 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14822 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14825 \begin_layout Labeling
14826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 Alters the size of the font.
14833 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14834 proportional to the document font size.
14835 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14836 the details, but a general description of what
14842 \begin_layout Labeling
14843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14867 arg "font-size tiny"
14875 \begin_layout Labeling
14876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14908 \begin_layout Labeling
14909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14933 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14941 \begin_layout Labeling
14942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 arg "font-size small"
14974 \begin_layout Labeling
14975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 It's also the default size.
14996 arg "font-size normal"
15004 \begin_layout Labeling
15005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 arg "font-size large"
15037 \begin_layout Labeling
15038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15062 arg "font-size larger"
15070 \begin_layout Labeling
15071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15095 arg "font-size largest"
15103 \begin_layout Labeling
15104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15128 arg "font-size huge"
15136 \begin_layout Labeling
15137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15161 arg "font-size giant"
15169 \begin_layout Labeling
15170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15176 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15198 arg "font-size increase"
15206 \begin_layout Labeling
15207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15213 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15235 arg "font-size decrease"
15244 \begin_layout Standard
15251 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15252 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15254 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15255 — use those instead.
15256 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15259 \begin_layout Labeling
15260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15266 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
15271 \begin_layout Labeling
15272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15280 This is text with emphasize on
15283 This might seem like the same as
15287 , but it is actually a bit different.
15293 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15295 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15298 \begin_layout Labeling
15299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15307 This is text with Underbar on.
15315 arg "font-underline"
15323 \begin_inset Newline newline
15328 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15329 when you could not change fonts.
15330 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15331 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15332 because some people
15336 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15339 \begin_layout Labeling
15340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15352 This is text with Double underbar on.
15360 arg "font-underunderline"
15366 \begin_inset Newline newline
15369 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15370 about double underbar.
15373 \begin_layout Labeling
15374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15386 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
15394 arg "font-underwave"
15400 \begin_inset Newline newline
15403 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15404 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15407 \begin_layout Labeling
15408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15413 \begin_inset space ~
15420 This is text with Strikeout on.
15428 arg "font-strikeout"
15434 \begin_inset Newline newline
15437 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15438 changed in the meantime.
15441 \begin_layout Labeling
15442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15447 \begin_inset space ~
15454 This is text with Cross out on.
15457 \begin_inset Newline newline
15460 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15463 \begin_layout Labeling
15464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15472 This is text with Noun on.
15479 , this is a logical attribute.
15480 Normally it's equivalent to
15483 \begin_inset space ~
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15495 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
15496 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
15498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15511 arg "dialog-show character"
15516 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
15517 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
15522 arg "textstyle-apply"
15528 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15532 \begin_layout Standard
15535 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15546 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15547 (suppose you just set the shape to
15548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15578 \begin_layout Standard
15581 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15589 \begin_inset space ~
15601 \begin_layout Itemize
15608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15615 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15633 \begin_inset Newline newline
15637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15653 \begin_inset Note Note
15656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15659 For more on phantoms see section
15660 \begin_inset space ~
15664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15666 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15676 \begin_inset Newline newline
15682 \begin_layout Itemize
15688 fonts use characters with serifs.
15689 These are the small
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15697 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15698 The following example shows the difference:
15699 \begin_inset Newline newline
15703 \begin_inset Newline newline
15708 text without serifs
15711 \begin_inset Newline newline
15714 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15715 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15722 \begin_layout Itemize
15728 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15729 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15730 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15733 \begin_layout Standard
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15744 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15747 \begin_inset space ~
15752 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15753 the property to be removed.
15754 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15755 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15756 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15774 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15775 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15787 \begin_inset space ~
15792 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15803 If you, for example, set
15804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15827 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15836 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15842 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15843 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15846 \begin_layout Section
15850 \begin_layout Subsection
15854 \begin_layout Standard
15857 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15858 using \SpecialChar LyX
15859 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15860 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15861 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15862 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15864 Additional Features
15869 \begin_layout Standard
15873 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15876 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15877 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15878 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15881 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15882 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15883 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15884 to turn your writing into printable output.
15885 This happens in two stages:
15888 \begin_layout Enumerate
15891 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15892 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15894 a file with the extension,
15895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15909 \begin_layout Enumerate
15912 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15913 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15914 to use the commands in the
15918 file to produce printable output.
15921 \begin_layout Subsection
15923 \begin_inset Index idx
15926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15935 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15944 \begin_inset Index idx
15947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15959 This file type has the extension
15960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15972 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15976 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15983 \begin_layout Standard
15986 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15988 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15989 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15991 \begin_inset space ~
15997 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15998 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15999 bibliography (section
16002 \begin_inset space ~
16006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16008 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16015 If your document includes such material, use
16017 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16020 \begin_inset space ~
16024 \begin_inset space ~
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_inset space ~
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16046 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16047 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16053 \begin_inset Index idx
16056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16068 This file type has the extension
16069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16080 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16083 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16084 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16085 -Errors or to process it manually
16086 with console commands.
16087 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16088 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16089 's temporary directory whenever you
16090 view or export your document.
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16096 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16097 -file using the menu
16099 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16100 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16104 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16105 export variants are explained in section
16108 \begin_inset space ~
16112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16114 reference "subsec:Export"
16121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16123 \begin_inset Index idx
16126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 \begin_layout Standard
16138 This file type has the extension
16139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16159 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16160 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16161 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16168 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16169 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16170 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16171 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16172 when you view the DVI.
16173 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16176 \begin_layout Standard
16179 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16181 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16182 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16188 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16190 \begin_inset space ~
16196 The latter option uses the program
16198 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16204 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16207 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16208 font access (see section
16209 \begin_inset space ~
16213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16215 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16220 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16221 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16228 \begin_inset Index idx
16231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16232 هيئة الملف ! بوست سكربت
16240 \begin_layout Standard
16243 This file type has the extension
16244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16256 PostScript was developed by the company
16260 as a printer language.
16261 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16263 PostScript can be seen as a
16264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16267 programming language
16268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16271 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16286 \begin_inset Index idx
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16290 حزمة لتيك ! pstricks
16300 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16303 \begin_layout Standard
16306 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 Encapsulated PostScript
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16314 (EPS, file extension
16315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16327 As \SpecialChar LyX
16328 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16329 convert them in the background to EPS.
16330 If, for example, you have 50
16331 \begin_inset space ~
16334 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16340 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16342 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16343 EPS to avoid this problem.
16346 \begin_layout Standard
16349 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16351 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16352 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16360 \begin_inset Index idx
16363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16370 \begin_inset Index idx
16373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16384 \begin_layout Standard
16387 This file type has the extension
16388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16404 Portable Document Format
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16412 was derived from PostScript.
16413 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16422 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16423 looks exactly the same.
16426 \begin_layout Standard
16429 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16433 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 (JPG, file extension
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 Portable Network Graphics
16466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16469 (PNG, file extension
16470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16482 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16483 converts them in the
16484 background to one of these formats.
16485 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16486 will slow down your workflow.
16487 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16491 يمكنك تصدير مستندك إلى PDF بعد طرق من خلال
16493 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
16497 \begin_layout Description
16501 \begin_inset space ~
16504 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16508 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16511 \begin_layout Description
16515 \begin_inset space ~
16522 ) This uses the program
16524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16527 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16533 is a new engine, derived from
16537 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16538 access (see section
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16550 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16551 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16556 \begin_layout Description
16560 \begin_inset space ~
16567 ) This uses the program
16572 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16578 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16579 font access (see section
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16586 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16591 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16592 vertically written Japanese.
16595 \begin_layout Description
16599 \begin_inset space ~
16602 (cropped) This is the same as
16605 \begin_inset space ~
16610 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16611 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16612 to generate good-looking
16613 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16616 \begin_layout Description
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16623 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16627 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16631 \begin_layout Description
16635 \begin_inset space ~
16638 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16642 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16643 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16647 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16648 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16666 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16667 works without problems.
16668 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16669 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16673 \begin_inset space ~
16681 \begin_inset space ~
16686 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16696 \begin_inset Index idx
16699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16706 \begin_inset Index idx
16709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16723 This file type has the extension
16724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16737 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16738 When \SpecialChar LyX
16739 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16740 suitable for the purpose.
16741 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16744 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16747 between different formats, which are described in section
16749 Math Output in XHTML
16754 \begin_inset space ~
16762 \begin_layout Standard
16765 XHTML output remains
16766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16773 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16774 features are supported yet.
16778 and the World Wide Web
16782 Additional Features
16784 manual, for more information.
16787 \begin_layout Standard
16790 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16792 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16793 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16799 \begin_layout Subsection
16801 \begin_inset Index idx
16804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16813 \begin_layout Standard
16816 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16817 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16826 or use the toolbar button
16837 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16838 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16845 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16849 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16857 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16862 Further output formats can be selected via
16864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16865 View (Other Formats)
16867 or the toolbar button
16878 \begin_layout Standard
16881 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16882 viewer window using the menu
16884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16890 Update (Other Formats)
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16898 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16901 To have a real output, export your document.
16904 \begin_layout Section
16905 كلمات قليلة عن الطباعة
16906 \begin_inset Index idx
16909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16918 \begin_layout Subsection
16919 الواصلات, وعلامتا الشرطة والناقص
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16945 In \SpecialChar LyX
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16958 symbol comes in four variants: the
16975 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16981 \begin_layout Standard
16984 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16994 height_special "totalheight"
16999 backgroundcolor "none"
17002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17005 \begin_inset Tabular
17006 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17007 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17008 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17009 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17010 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17011 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17046 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17092 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17121 system key combination or
17122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17135 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17164 system key combination or
17165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17243 \begin_layout Standard
17246 Dashes can also be inserted with
17248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17250 \begin_inset space ~
17253 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17261 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17262 and 2014 for the en dash).
17265 \begin_layout Standard
17268 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17269 mode and has a length of its own.
17270 Here are some examples:
17273 \begin_layout Enumerate
17276 line- and page-breaks
17277 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17287 \begin_layout Enumerate
17291 \begin_inset space ~
17295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17305 \begin_layout Enumerate
17308 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17319 \begin_layout Enumerate
17322 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17326 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17336 \begin_layout Standard
17340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17342 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17343 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17351 \begin_layout Subsection
17353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17355 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17365 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17366 case and locale, e.
17367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17373 \begin_layout Itemize
17376 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17377 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17380 \begin_layout Itemize
17383 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17387 \begin_layout Itemize
17390 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17391 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17394 \begin_layout Standard
17397 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17398 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17409 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17412 \begin_layout Enumerate
17415 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17416 \begin_inset space ~
17419 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17421 The Elements of Typographic Style
17424 \begin_inset space ~
17427 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17430 \begin_layout Enumerate
17433 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17442 Prevent Hyphenation
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17463 in \SpecialChar TeX
17469 \begin_layout Itemize
17473 \begin_inset space ~
17477 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17487 height_special "totalheight"
17492 backgroundcolor "none"
17495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17506 \begin_layout Itemize
17510 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17520 height_special "totalheight"
17525 backgroundcolor "none"
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17540 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17541 \begin_inset space ~
17544 – sont très utiles.
17547 \begin_layout Itemize
17554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17563 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17570 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17574 – in contrast to an overfull line
17575 \begin_inset space ~
17578 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17585 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17590 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17591 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17596 \begin_layout Enumerate
17599 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17600 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17601 or \SpecialChar TeX
17607 \begin_layout Itemize
17611 \begin_inset space ~
17614 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17615 \begin_inset space ~
17618 – sont très utiles.
17622 \begin_layout Enumerate
17625 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17626 \begin_inset Newline newline
17631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17632 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17633 Optional line break
17639 \begin_layout Itemize
17642 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17643 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17644 should be followed by
17645 a line break opportunity.
17648 \begin_layout Standard
17651 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17652 \begin_inset space ~
17656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17658 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17669 \begin_layout Enumerate
17672 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17673 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17674 or en dashes (see section
17675 \begin_inset space ~
17679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17681 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17694 Changes and backwards compatibility
17697 \begin_layout Standard
17700 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
17706 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
17708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17715 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
17716 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17724 \begin_layout Standard
17727 Since \SpecialChar LyX
17729 \begin_inset space ~
17732 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17734 prevents ligation to dashes.
17736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17743 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
17748 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
17749 after the input (unless the current text font is
17757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17760 The behavior was changed since
17761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17776 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
17777 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17778 as non-breakable dashes.
17779 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17793 \begin_inset space ~
17801 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17803 \begin_inset space ~
17806 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17811 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17812 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17814 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17818 If you used both literal and
17819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17826 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17828 \begin_inset space ~
17831 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17832 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17835 \begin_layout Subsection
17837 \begin_inset Index idx
17840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17849 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17856 \begin_layout Standard
17859 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17860 but automatically in the output.
17861 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17869 \begin_inset Index idx
17872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17880 following the rules of the document language.
17882 does not hyphenate text in the
17886 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17889 \begin_layout Standard
17893 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17897 font and with unusual constructs, like
17898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17906 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17907 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17908 This is done with the menu
17910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17913 \begin_inset space ~
17919 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17921 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17925 \begin_layout Standard
17928 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17929 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17940 would then see the hyphen
17941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17948 as a line break possibility.
17949 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17950 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17954 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17957 ) or put it into a makebox
17960 \begin_layout Standard
17963 as described in section
17965 Prevent Hyphenation
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Subsection
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17993 الاختصارات ونهايات الجمل
17994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17996 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18003 \begin_layout Standard
18006 When \SpecialChar LyX
18007 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18008 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18010 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18016 appropriate amount of space.
18017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18022 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18023 gets after another word.
18026 \begin_layout Standard
18029 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18030 not work in all cases.
18032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18043 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18044 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18050 Here are some examples of
18054 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18057 \begin_layout Itemize
18064 \begin_layout Itemize
18071 \begin_layout Standard
18074 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18077 \begin_layout Itemize
18081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18085 this is too much space!
18088 \begin_layout Itemize
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18098 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18101 \begin_layout Standard
18104 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18107 \begin_layout Enumerate
18113 \begin_inset space ~
18118 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18125 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18132 \begin_inset Index idx
18135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18136 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
18144 \begin_layout Enumerate
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18155 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18162 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18169 \begin_inset Index idx
18172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18181 \begin_layout Enumerate
18187 \begin_inset space ~
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18204 \begin_inset space ~
18209 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18210 This function is also bound to
18215 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18223 \begin_layout Standard
18226 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18229 \begin_layout Itemize
18233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18237 \begin_inset space \space{}
18240 this is too much space!
18243 \begin_layout Itemize
18246 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18253 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18254 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18256 will take care of this.
18259 \begin_layout Standard
18262 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18266 \begin_inset space ~
18272 feature described in the section
18274 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18279 Additional Features
18284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18290 طباعة ! علامات الاقتباس
18296 \begin_inset Index idx
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 علامات الاقتباس | أنظر
18304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18330 \begin_layout Standard
18334 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18335 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18336 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18346 The keyboard character,
18350 , generates this automatically.
18353 \begin_layout Standard
18356 You can specify what character the
18360 key produces by using the submenu
18366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 dialog and switching the
18386 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18387 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18389 \begin_inset space ~
18395 \begin_layout Labeling
18396 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 \begin_inset space ~
18413 \begin_inset space ~
18417 \begin_inset Quotes els
18421 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18435 \begin_inset Quotes els
18439 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18442 quotation marks (as common, e.
18443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18449 \begin_layout Labeling
18450 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18454 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18458 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18462 \begin_inset space ~
18466 \begin_inset space ~
18470 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18474 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18480 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18488 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18492 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18495 quotation marks (as common, e.
18496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18502 \begin_layout Labeling
18503 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18507 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18511 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18519 \begin_inset space ~
18523 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18527 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18533 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18541 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18545 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18548 quotation marks (as common, e.
18549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18555 \begin_layout Labeling
18556 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18560 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18564 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18568 \begin_inset space ~
18572 \begin_inset space ~
18576 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18580 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18586 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18590 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18594 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18598 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18601 quotation marks (as common, e.
18602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18608 \begin_layout Labeling
18609 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18613 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18617 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18621 \begin_inset space ~
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18629 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18633 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18639 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18643 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18647 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18651 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18654 quotation marks (as common, e.
18655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18658 g., in Switzerland)
18661 \begin_layout Labeling
18662 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18666 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18670 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18674 \begin_inset space ~
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18682 \begin_inset Quotes als
18686 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18692 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18696 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18700 \begin_inset Quotes als
18704 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18707 quotation marks (as common, e.
18708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18714 \begin_layout Labeling
18715 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18719 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18723 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18739 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18745 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18749 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18753 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18757 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18760 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18763 \begin_layout Labeling
18764 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18768 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18772 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18776 \begin_inset space ~
18780 \begin_inset space ~
18784 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18788 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18794 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18798 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18802 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18806 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18809 quotation marks (as common, e.
18810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18813 g., in Great Britain)
18816 \begin_layout Labeling
18817 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18821 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18825 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18829 \begin_inset space ~
18833 \begin_inset space ~
18837 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18841 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18847 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18851 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18855 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18859 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18862 quotation marks (as common, e.
18863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18869 \begin_layout Labeling
18870 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18874 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18878 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18882 \begin_inset space ~
18886 \begin_inset space ~
18890 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18894 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18900 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18904 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18908 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18912 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18915 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18922 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18923 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18924 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18925 the inner marks differ).
18933 \begin_layout Labeling
18934 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18938 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18942 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18946 \begin_inset space ~
18950 \begin_inset space ~
18954 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18958 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18964 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18968 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18972 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18976 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18979 quotation marks (as common, e.
18980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18986 \begin_layout Labeling
18987 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18991 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18995 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19011 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19017 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19021 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19025 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19029 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19032 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19035 \begin_layout Standard
19038 Inner quotation marks
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19046 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19047 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19055 does not necessarily mean
19056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19064 This is why we call them
19065 \begin_inset Quotes els
19069 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19085 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19087 \begin_inset Quotes els
19091 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19094 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19099 arg "quote-insert inner"
19106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19115 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19116 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19117 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19118 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19119 If you check the setting
19121 Use dynamic quotation marks
19125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19129 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19130 they appear in a special color).
19131 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19132 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19137 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19140 \begin_layout Standard
19143 Individual quotation marks (i.
19144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19147 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19148 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19152 \begin_layout Subsection
19154 \begin_inset Index idx
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 \begin_inset Index idx
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19198 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19205 \begin_layout Standard
19208 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19209 print them as single characters.
19210 These groups are known as
19215 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19216 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19218 Here are the standard ligatures:
19221 \begin_layout Itemize
19227 \begin_layout Itemize
19233 \begin_layout Itemize
19239 \begin_layout Itemize
19245 \begin_layout Itemize
19251 \begin_layout Standard
19254 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19260 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19261 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19269 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19285 To break a ligature, use
19287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19288 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19290 \begin_inset space ~
19297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19308 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19325 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19333 \begin_layout Subsection
19334 رمزي \SpecialChar LyX
19335 و \SpecialChar LaTeX
19337 \begin_inset Index idx
19340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 \begin_layout Standard
19354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19355 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19359 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19362 \begin_layout Description
19367 \begin_layout Description
19369 محرك المحارف المستخدم في هذا البرنامج \SpecialChar LyX
19373 \begin_layout Description
19377 The \SpecialChar TeX
19378 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19382 \begin_layout Description
19383 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19384 الإصدار الحالي من \SpecialChar LaTeX
19388 \begin_layout Standard
19391 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19397 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19405 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19406 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19407 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19408 converges to the number
19409 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19412 : The actual version is
19413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19421 , the previous one was
19422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19433 \begin_layout Subsection
19435 \begin_inset Index idx
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 \begin_layout Standard
19450 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19451 space between two words.
19452 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19462 for units use the menu
19464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19465 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19467 \begin_inset space ~
19477 arg "space-insert thin"
19485 \begin_layout Standard
19486 هذا مثال لتشاهد الفرق:
19489 \begin_layout Standard
19490 \begin_inset Tabular
19491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19492 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19493 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 \begin_inset space ~
19505 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
19524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19533 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 نصف المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
19558 \begin_layout Subsection
19560 \begin_inset Index idx
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 طباعة ! نافذة وأيتام
19572 \begin_layout Standard
19575 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19577 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19578 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19579 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19580 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19581 These bits of text became known as
19592 \begin_layout Standard
19595 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19596 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19597 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19598 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19599 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19600 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19601 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19602 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19603 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19604 \begin_inset Newline newline
19612 \begin_inset Newline newline
19620 \begin_inset Newline newline
19623 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19624 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19625 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19627 \begin_inset space ~
19631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19633 key "latexcompanion"
19639 \begin_inset space ~
19643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19650 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19651 's page break mechanism.
19654 \begin_layout Chapter
19655 الملاحظات، الصور، الجداول والتعويم
19656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19658 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19665 \begin_layout Standard
19668 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19671 \begin_inset space ~
19677 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19680 \begin_layout Section
19682 \begin_inset Index idx
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19701 \begin_layout Standard
19705 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19708 \begin_layout Description
19713 \begin_inset space ~
19716 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19717 \begin_inset Newline newline
19721 \begin_inset Note Note
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19735 \begin_layout Description
19738 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19739 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19740 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19743 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19744 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19746 \begin_inset space ~
19752 \begin_inset Newline newline
19756 \begin_inset Note Comment
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19771 \begin_layout Description
19775 \begin_inset space ~
19778 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19779 set in the document settings under
19781 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19783 \begin_inset space ~
19789 \begin_inset Newline newline
19793 \begin_inset Newline newline
19797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19811 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19816 of a comment that appears in the output.
19822 \begin_inset Newline newline
19826 \begin_inset Newline newline
19829 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19832 \begin_layout Standard
19835 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19851 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19854 \begin_layout Section
19856 \begin_inset Index idx
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19868 name "sec:Footnotes"
19875 \begin_layout Standard
19879 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19885 or the toolbar button
19890 arg "footnote-insert"
19904 \begin_inset Graphics
19905 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
19914 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19915 's representation of your footnote.
19925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19944 label, the box will
19948 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19949 Clicking on the box label again will close
19962 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19963 and click on the footnote
19978 \begin_layout Standard
19981 Here is an example footnote:
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20000 \begin_layout Standard
20003 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20004 position where the footnote box is placed.
20005 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20006 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20007 according to the document class.
20009 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20010 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20016 ey are described in the
20019 \begin_inset space ~
20027 \begin_layout Section
20029 \begin_inset Index idx
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20041 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20048 \begin_layout Standard
20051 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20053 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20057 \begin_inset space ~
20062 or the toolbar button
20067 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20095 appearing within your text.
20096 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20097 's representation of your margin
20106 \begin_layout Standard
20109 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20113 \begin_inset Marginal
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 \begin_layout Standard
20129 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20130 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20131 pages, right on odd pages.
20134 \begin_layout Standard
20137 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20140 \begin_inset space ~
20148 \begin_inset space ~
20156 \begin_layout Section
20157 الصور والرسوم التوضيحية
20158 \begin_inset Index idx
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 \begin_inset Index idx
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20180 name "sec:Graphics"
20187 \begin_layout Standard
20190 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20191 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20207 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20210 \begin_layout Standard
20213 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20218 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20219 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20221 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20224 \begin_inset space ~
20228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20230 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20237 \begin_layout Standard
20244 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20245 of the image in the output.
20246 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20250 \begin_inset space ~
20254 \begin_inset space ~
20263 \begin_inset space ~
20267 \begin_inset space ~
20271 \begin_inset space ~
20276 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20277 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20285 \begin_layout Standard
20291 \begin_inset space ~
20295 \begin_inset space ~
20300 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20301 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20303 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20308 \begin_inset space ~
20313 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20314 with the image size is printed.
20317 \begin_layout Standard
20320 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20321 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20323 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20326 \begin_layout Standard
20328 \begin_inset Graphics
20329 filename ../clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20337 \begin_layout Standard
20340 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20341 the image into a float, see section
20344 \begin_inset space ~
20348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20350 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20357 \begin_layout Subsection
20359 \begin_inset Index idx
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20371 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20378 \begin_layout Standard
20381 You can insert images in any known file format.
20382 But as we explained in section
20383 \begin_inset space ~
20387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20389 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20393 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20395 therefore uses the program
20399 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20400 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20401 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20402 \begin_inset space ~
20406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20408 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20415 \begin_layout Standard
20418 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20421 \begin_layout Description
20425 \begin_inset space ~
20428 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20429 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20430 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20434 Graphics Interchange Format
20435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20438 (GIF, file extension
20439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20453 \begin_inset Index idx
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20492 Portable Network Graphics
20493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20496 (PNG, file extension
20497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20511 \begin_inset Index idx
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20550 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20554 (JPG, file extension
20555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20581 \begin_inset Index idx
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 \begin_layout Description
20621 \begin_inset space ~
20624 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20626 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20627 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20628 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20629 \begin_inset Newline newline
20632 Scalable image formats can be
20633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20636 Scalable Vector Graphics
20637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20640 (SVG, file extension
20641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20655 \begin_inset Index idx
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20694 Encapsulated PostScript
20695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20698 (EPS, file extension
20699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20713 \begin_inset Index idx
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20752 Portable Document Format
20753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20756 (PDF, file extension
20757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20771 \begin_inset Index idx
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20793 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20794 result will not be scalable.
20795 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20811 \begin_layout Standard
20814 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20821 \begin_layout Subsection
20822 إعدادات مجموعة الصور
20823 \begin_inset Index idx
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 صور ! إعدادات المجموعات
20835 \begin_layout Standard
20838 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20840 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20841 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20843 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20844 need to manually change each of them.
20848 \begin_layout Standard
20851 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20854 \begin_inset space ~
20858 \begin_inset space ~
20870 \begin_inset space ~
20874 \begin_inset space ~
20880 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20881 and checking the name of the desired group.
20884 \begin_layout Section
20886 \begin_inset Index idx
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20908 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20913 arg "tabular-insert"
20920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20924 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20925 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20926 from the rest of the table.
20927 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20928 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20930 Here is an example table:
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20935 \begin_inset Tabular
20936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 \begin_layout Subsection
21105 \begin_layout Standard
21108 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21111 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21115 This brings up the table dialog.
21116 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21117 cursor is placed currently.
21118 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21119 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21120 done on all of your selection.
21123 \begin_layout Standard
21126 In addition to the table dialog, the
21129 \begin_inset space ~
21134 helps you in setting table properties.
21135 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21138 \begin_layout Standard
21144 \begin_inset space ~
21149 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21150 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21151 current cell respectively.
21152 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21154 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21155 of text, see section
21158 \begin_inset space ~
21162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21164 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21171 \begin_layout Standard
21174 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21175 using the check box
21184 This will merge the cells to
21188 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21189 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21190 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21191 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21192 in the last row without the upper border:
21195 \begin_layout Standard
21197 \begin_inset Tabular
21198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21199 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21201 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21328 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21329 -arguments for the table.
21330 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21331 explained in the chapter
21338 \begin_inset space ~
21344 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21345 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21346 but are visible in the output.
21349 \begin_layout Standard
21352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 Most DVI-viewers are
21365 able to display rotations.
21373 \begin_layout Standard
21380 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21385 adds lines for all cell borders.
21388 \begin_layout Subsection
21389 الجداول متعددة-الصفحات
21390 \begin_inset Index idx
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 جداول ! صفحات متعددة
21400 \begin_inset Index idx
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 جداول متعددة الصفحات
21412 \begin_layout Standard
21415 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21422 \begin_inset space ~
21430 \begin_inset space ~
21435 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21436 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21439 \begin_layout Description
21445 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21446 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21447 Except for the first page, if
21450 \begin_inset space ~
21458 \begin_layout Description
21463 \begin_inset space ~
21468 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21469 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21472 \begin_layout Description
21478 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21479 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21480 except for the last page, if
21483 \begin_inset space ~
21491 \begin_layout Description
21496 \begin_inset space ~
21501 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21502 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21505 \begin_layout Description
21508 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21509 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21515 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21518 \begin_inset space ~
21526 \begin_layout Standard
21529 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21530 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21531 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21537 In this context, first means first in this order:
21540 \begin_inset space ~
21552 \begin_inset space ~
21557 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21560 \begin_layout Standard
21562 \begin_inset Tabular
21563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21564 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21565 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21566 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21567 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21568 <row endfirsthead="true">
21569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 مثال قائمة الهاتف (تجاهل الأسماء)
21580 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 <row endfirsthead="true">
21600 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <row endhead="true">
21633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <row endhead="true">
21664 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <row endfoot="true">
21697 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21708 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21748 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <row endlastfoot="true">
23679 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 \begin_layout Subsection
23718 \begin_inset Index idx
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23730 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23737 \begin_layout Standard
23740 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23741 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23742 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23743 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23747 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23750 \begin_layout Standard
23753 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23754 for the column in the table dialog.
23755 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23756 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23760 \begin_layout Standard
23764 \begin_inset Tabular
23765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23766 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23768 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 This is longer now.
23927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23982 This is longer now.
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 \begin_layout Standard
24017 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24018 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24026 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24032 Selection with the mouse or with
24036 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24037 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24038 the selection from outside the table.
24041 \begin_layout Section
24043 \begin_inset Index idx
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24062 \begin_layout Subsection
24066 \begin_layout Standard
24069 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24070 have a fixed location.
24072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24079 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24087 \begin_inset space ~
24092 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24093 too many notes on the current page.
24096 \begin_layout Standard
24099 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24100 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24101 and pages without text.
24102 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24103 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24104 Floats are therefore numbered.
24105 Referencing is described in section
24106 \begin_inset space ~
24110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24112 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24119 \begin_layout Standard
24122 To insert a float, use the menu
24124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24128 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24129 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24131 After the label you can insert the caption text
24134 \begin_inset Index idx
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24146 paragraph within the float.
24147 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24148 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24149 left-clicking on the box label.
24150 A closed float box looks like this:
24153 \begin_inset Graphics
24154 filename ../clipart/float.png
24161 – a gray button with a red label.
24164 \begin_layout Standard
24167 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24169 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24172 \begin_layout Subsection
24173 تعويم الرسم التوضيحي
24174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24176 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24181 \begin_inset Index idx
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 \begin_layout Standard
24197 \begin_inset space ~
24201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24203 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24207 was created using the menu
24209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24210 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24218 arg "float-insert figure"
24224 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24235 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24241 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24242 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24246 \begin_inset space ~
24256 arg "layout-paragraph"
24264 \begin_layout Standard
24265 \begin_inset Float figure
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 \begin_inset Graphics
24273 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24288 name "fig:A-star-in"
24305 \begin_layout Standard
24308 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24309 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24324 ) and refer to it using the menu
24326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24334 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24340 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24341 vague references like
24342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24349 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24350 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24360 For more about cross-references, see section
24361 \begin_inset space ~
24365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24367 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24374 \begin_layout Standard
24377 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24378 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24379 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24380 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24381 as described in section
24382 \begin_inset space ~
24386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24388 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24394 \begin_inset space ~
24398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24400 reference "fig:Two-images"
24404 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24405 You can also set the images one below the other.
24407 \begin_inset space ~
24411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24413 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24420 reference "fig:Star"
24424 are the subfigures.
24427 \begin_layout Standard
24428 \begin_inset Float figure
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24438 \begin_inset Float figure
24443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24449 name "fig:Undefinable"
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 \begin_inset Graphics
24463 filename ../clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24475 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24479 \begin_inset Float figure
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24485 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 \begin_inset Graphics
24504 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24528 name "fig:Two-images"
24545 \begin_layout Subsection
24547 \begin_inset Index idx
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24560 تعويم الجدول يمكن إدراجه باستخدام قائمة
24562 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
24563 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
24569 arg "float-insert table"
24573 وله نفس إعدادات تعويم الرسم التوضيحي باستثناء أن التعليق يكون فوق الجدول
24574 ولي تحته مثل تعليق الرسم التوضيحي ويبدأ التعليق بكلمة جدول
24575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24577 reference "tab:Table-float"
24584 \begin_layout Standard
24585 \begin_inset Float table
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24596 name "tab:Table-float"
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 \begin_inset Tabular
24611 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24612 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24613 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24614 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24694 \end{array}\right]$
24702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24706 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24727 \begin_layout Subsection
24729 \begin_inset Index idx
24732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 \begin_layout Standard
24745 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24746 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24747 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24749 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24757 \begin_inset space ~
24765 \begin_layout Section
24767 \begin_inset Index idx
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24783 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24785 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24786 \begin_inset space \space{}
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24796 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24797 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24803 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24804 and its alignment within the page.
24807 \begin_layout Standard
24809 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24819 height_special "totalheight"
24824 backgroundcolor "none"
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 This is a minipage.
24831 The text is set in an italic style.
24834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24837 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24838 another formatting.
24846 \begin_layout Standard
24847 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24853 \begin_layout Standard
24854 إذا وضعت صندوقين نصيين بجوار بعضهما، يمكنك استخدام
24861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24863 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24895 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24901 \begin_layout Standard
24904 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24914 height_special "totalheight"
24919 backgroundcolor "none"
24922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية
24930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24934 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24944 height_special "totalheight"
24949 backgroundcolor "none"
24952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم، عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية
24962 \begin_layout Standard
24963 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24969 \begin_layout Standard
24972 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24974 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24981 \begin_inset space ~
24989 \begin_layout Chapter
24991 \begin_inset Index idx
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25001 \begin_inset Index idx
25004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25035 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25042 \begin_layout Standard
25045 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25050 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25053 \begin_layout Section
25054 محرر الرياضيات الأساسي
25055 \begin_inset Index idx
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 \begin_layout Standard
25070 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25091 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25093 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25094 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25095 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25103 \begin_layout Standard
25106 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25110 \begin_inset space ~
25115 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25118 \begin_layout Standard
25121 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25122 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25125 \begin_layout Standard
25128 This is a line with an inline formula
25129 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25135 \begin_layout Standard
25138 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25139 paragraph, like this one:
25142 \begin_inset Formula
25151 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25154 \begin_layout Standard
25158 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25160 For example, typing
25161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25174 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25175 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25179 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25182 \begin_inset space ~
25190 \begin_layout Subsection
25192 \begin_inset Index idx
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_layout Standard
25207 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25208 achieved with the arrow keys.
25210 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25211 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25216 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25217 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25221 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25225 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25228 \end{array}\right]$
25236 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25241 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25242 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25245 \begin_layout Standard
25251 , printed in this document as
25252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25256 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25263 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25264 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25265 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25270 For example, if you want
25271 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25279 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25289 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25298 , since in the latter case only the
25301 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25306 will be under the square root sign:
25307 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25313 \begin_layout Standard
25316 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25320 \begin_inset Formula
25322 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25333 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25334 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25337 \begin_layout Subsection
25341 \begin_layout Standard
25344 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25345 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25349 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25350 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25351 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25352 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25353 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25357 \begin_layout Subsection
25358 النص العلوي والسفلي
25359 \begin_inset Index idx
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 \begin_inset Index idx
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25384 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25389 arg "math-superscript"
25399 arg "math-subscript"
25404 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25406 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25409 , type in a formula
25412 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25422 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25428 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25432 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25438 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25444 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25453 , you have to use an extra
25457 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25458 For example, if you want
25459 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25465 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25471 Subscripts are similar: To get
25472 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25478 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25486 \begin_layout Subsection
25488 \begin_inset Index idx
25491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25503 Create a fraction either with the command
25509 or by using the icon
25514 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25522 \begin_inset space ~
25528 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25529 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25530 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25535 To move back up, press
25540 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25543 \begin_inset Formula
25545 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25548 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25556 \begin_layout Subsection
25558 \begin_inset Index idx
25561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25571 الجذور يمكن إدراجها باستخدام الزرين
25574 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25580 arg "math-insert \\root"
25602 خاص بالجذر التربيعي فقط، أما
25611 \begin_layout Subsection
25613 \begin_inset Index idx
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 \begin_inset Index idx
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25635 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25642 \begin_layout Standard
25646 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25650 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25653 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25654 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25655 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25656 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25657 The sum operator will automatically place its
25658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25665 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25667 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25673 \begin_inset Formula
25675 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25682 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25689 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25691 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25692 behind the operator and using the menu
25694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25695 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25697 \begin_inset space ~
25701 \begin_inset space ~
25719 \begin_layout Standard
25722 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25733 \begin_inset Index idx
25736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 \begin_inset Formula
25747 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25752 which will place the
25753 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25765 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25766 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25775 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25782 Have a look at section
25783 \begin_inset space ~
25787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25789 reference "subsec:Functions"
25793 for an explanation of function macros.
25796 \begin_layout Subsection
25798 \begin_inset Index idx
25801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 \begin_layout Standard
25813 Most math symbols can be found in the
25816 \begin_inset space ~
25821 under one of several categories; including
25838 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25845 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25846 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25847 don't have to use the
25850 \begin_inset space ~
25855 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25857 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25860 \begin_layout Subsection
25862 \begin_inset Index idx
25865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25874 \begin_layout Standard
25877 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25885 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25893 \begin_inset space ~
25903 arg "math-insert \\space"
25909 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25910 For example, the sequence
25915 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25918 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25922 \begin_inset Graphics
25923 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25930 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25931 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25932 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25933 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25934 , because they are negative
25936 Here are two examples:
25939 \begin_layout Standard
25950 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25956 \begin_layout Standard
25967 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25973 \begin_layout Subsection
25975 \begin_inset Index idx
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25987 name "subsec:Functions"
25994 \begin_layout Standard
26000 \begin_inset space ~
26005 contains under the button
26010 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26015 a number of function macros, such as
26016 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26020 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26028 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26035 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26036 avoid confusions, because
26037 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26041 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26047 \begin_layout Standard
26050 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26052 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26056 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26062 \begin_layout Standard
26065 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26066 are placed, as described in section
26067 \begin_inset space ~
26071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26073 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26080 \begin_layout Subsection
26082 \begin_inset Index idx
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_layout Standard
26097 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26099 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26100 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26101 commands, for example, to enter
26102 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26105 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26106 Our example is entered by typing
26111 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26118 \begin_inset space ~
26122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26124 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26128 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26131 \begin_layout Standard
26132 \begin_inset Float table
26137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26138 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26143 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26147 أسماء اللهجات والأوامر المقابلة لها.
26155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26157 \begin_inset Tabular
26158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26219 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26255 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26327 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26567 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26580 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26585 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26589 \begin_layout Section
26591 \begin_inset Index idx
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26601 \begin_inset Index idx
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26613 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26623 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26625 For some purposes, using just the keys
26630 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26631 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26632 toolbar delimiter icon
26637 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26643 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26644 \begin_inset Formula
26646 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26654 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26655 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26661 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26666 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26672 \begin_inset Formula
26674 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26682 \begin_layout Standard
26685 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26686 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26693 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26694 left side and right side.
26695 If you use the option
26698 \begin_inset space ~
26703 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26704 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26706 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26711 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26712 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26715 \begin_layout Standard
26718 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26719 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26720 is to go inside the brackets.
26721 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26726 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26727 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26728 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26734 arg "math-delim ( )"
26740 \begin_layout Section
26741 المصفوفات والمعادلات متعددة الأسطر
26742 \begin_inset Index idx
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 \begin_inset Index idx
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26762 \begin_inset Index idx
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26766 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 المصفوفات يتم إدراجها في \SpecialChar LyX
26779 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26783 وسيتم فتح نافذة تسمح بتحديد عدد الصفوف والأعمدة.
26785 \begin_inset Formula
26787 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26798 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26799 \begin_inset space ~
26803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26805 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26810 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26811 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26812 This alignment is set in the box
26817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26866 for every column as default.
26867 For example, the sequence
26868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26879 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26880 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26881 corresponds to the relevant column.
26882 The result will look like this:
26883 \begin_inset Formula
26886 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26887 column & has & has\,right\\
26888 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26897 \begin_layout Standard
26900 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26905 arg "newline-insert newline"
26910 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26911 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26916 or the math toolbar.
26919 \begin_layout Standard
26922 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26923 It can be created with the menu
26925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26926 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26928 \begin_inset space ~
26940 Here is an example:
26941 \begin_inset Formula
26955 \begin_layout Standard
26958 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26961 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26966 arg "newline-insert newline"
26972 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26979 arg "newline-insert newline"
26984 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26992 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26993 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26994 A new row is created by every further entry of
26999 arg "newline-insert newline"
27005 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27006 Here is an example:
27007 \begin_inset Formula
27009 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27010 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27015 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27016 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27017 \begin_inset Formula
27019 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27027 \begin_layout Standard
27030 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27037 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27038 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27041 reference "eq:asquared"
27046 The other types are described in section
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27053 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27060 \begin_layout Section
27061 المعادلة المرقمة والعلامة المرجعية
27062 \begin_inset Index idx
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 رياضيات ! معادلة مرقمة
27072 \begin_inset Index idx
27075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27076 رياضيات ! معادلة مرجعية
27082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27084 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27091 \begin_layout Standard
27094 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27097 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27099 \begin_inset space ~
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27113 arg "math-number-toggle"
27119 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27120 within parentheses.
27121 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27122 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27123 the document class.
27124 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27125 separated by a dot:
27126 \begin_inset Formula
27138 arg "math-number-toggle"
27143 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27144 You can only number displayed formulas.
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27150 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27152 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27153 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27155 \begin_inset space ~
27159 \begin_inset space ~
27169 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27174 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27175 \begin_inset Formula
27178 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27184 To number all lines use the shortcut
27189 arg "math-number-toggle"
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27198 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27201 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27202 A label is inserted with the menu
27204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27217 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27218 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27219 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27232 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27233 We inserted in the following example the label
27234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27241 in the second line:
27242 \begin_inset Formula
27244 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27245 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27250 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27251 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27252 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27256 \begin_inset space ~
27266 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27272 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27273 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27274 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27275 as the formula number:
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27281 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27284 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27291 \begin_layout Standard
27294 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27295 's cross-reference box are described in section
27296 \begin_inset space ~
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27307 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27318 and we can replace the equation number with any text by
27322 tag* which writing in the end of formula.
27325 \begin_layout Section
27326 تعيين المستخدم لماكرو رياضي
27327 \begin_inset Index idx
27330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27343 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27344 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27345 Math macros are explained in section
27348 \begin_inset space ~
27360 \begin_layout Section
27364 \begin_layout Subsection
27366 \begin_inset Index idx
27369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27378 \begin_layout Standard
27381 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27382 To set a font in a formula, use the
27385 \begin_inset space ~
27395 arg "math-insert \\font"
27400 , or enter its command, listed in table
27401 \begin_inset space ~
27405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27407 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 \begin_inset Float table
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27426 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27430 مظهر الخط والأمر الخاص به.
27438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 \begin_inset Tabular
27441 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27442 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27524 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27551 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27578 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27605 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27634 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27661 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27726 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27727 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27732 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27733 space when you need a space in the box.
27734 Here is an example where
27735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27746 denotes the set of numbers:
27747 \begin_inset Formula
27749 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27760 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27761 You can, for example, put a character in
27770 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27774 \begin_inset Newline newline
27777 So it is better not to use this feature.
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27783 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27784 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27788 \begin_inset Newline newline
27791 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27797 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27798 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27812 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27815 \begin_layout Standard
27818 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27821 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27823 \begin_inset space ~
27831 \begin_layout Subsection
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27848 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27850 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27854 \begin_inset space ~
27858 \begin_inset space ~
27866 \begin_inset space ~
27876 arg "math-insert \\font"
27882 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27883 in black instead of blue.
27884 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27885 Here is an example:
27886 \begin_inset Formula
27889 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27890 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27899 \begin_layout Subsection
27901 \begin_inset Index idx
27904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27916 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27917 automatically chosen in most situations.
27935 For most characters,
27943 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27944 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27949 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27950 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27951 thinks are appropriate.
27952 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27957 arg "math-insert \\style"
27963 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27964 For example, you can set
27965 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27968 , which is normally in
27977 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27981 The four styles are used in the following example:
27984 \begin_layout Standard
27987 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27991 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27995 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27999 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28008 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28009 is set in a particular size with the menu
28011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28013 \begin_inset space ~
28018 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28019 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28020 will be adjusted to correspond.
28021 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28037 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28043 \begin_layout Section
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28071 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28072 that are in common use.
28075 \begin_layout Subsection
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28082 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28083 the document by selecting the checkbox
28086 \begin_inset space ~
28090 \begin_inset space ~
28094 \begin_inset space ~
28101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28106 \begin_inset Index idx
28109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 \begin_inset space ~
28126 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28127 -errors in formulas,
28128 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28131 \begin_layout Subsection
28132 أنواع معادلات حزمة AMS
28133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28135 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28140 \begin_inset Index idx
28143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28144 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28155 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28156 provides a selection of different formula types.
28158 allows you to choose between
28179 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28187 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28190 \begin_layout Chapter
28194 \begin_layout Section
28196 \begin_inset Index idx
28199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28208 name "sec:Cross-References"
28215 \begin_layout Standard
28218 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28219 's strengths is cross-references.
28220 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28222 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28223 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28224 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28227 \begin_layout Enumerate
28231 \begin_layout Enumerate
28232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28234 name "enu:Second-item"
28241 \begin_layout Enumerate
28245 \begin_layout Standard
28248 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28253 or by pressing the toolbar button
28264 A gray label box like this:
28267 \begin_inset Graphics
28268 filename ../clipart/label.png
28274 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28276 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28311 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28312 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28328 \begin_layout Standard
28331 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28336 or the toolbar button
28341 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28347 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28350 \begin_inset Graphics
28351 filename ../clipart/reference.png
28357 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28359 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28372 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28376 \begin_layout Standard
28379 As an alternative to
28381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28384 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28389 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28390 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28411 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28414 \begin_inset space ~
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28420 reference "enu:Second-item"
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28430 It is recommended to use a protected space
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 described in section
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28444 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28453 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28454 line breaks between them.
28457 \begin_layout Standard
28460 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28463 \begin_layout Description
28466 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default
28469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28471 reference "fig:Two-images"
28478 \begin_layout Description
28481 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28482 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28496 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28503 \begin_layout Description
28506 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28509 \begin_inset space ~
28513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28514 LatexCommand pageref
28515 reference "fig:Two-images"
28522 \begin_layout Description
28526 \begin_inset space ~
28530 \begin_inset space ~
28533 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number
28536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28537 LatexCommand vpageref
28538 reference "fig:Two-images"
28543 \begin_inset Newline newline
28548 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28549 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28550 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28551 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28552 it prints “on the next page”.
28553 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28556 \begin_layout Description
28560 \begin_inset space ~
28564 \begin_inset space ~
28568 \begin_inset space ~
28571 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28574 reference "fig:Two-images"
28579 \begin_inset Newline newline
28582 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28588 ; otherwise it behaves like
28592 \begin_inset space ~
28596 \begin_inset space ~
28605 \begin_layout Description
28609 \begin_inset space ~
28612 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28613 \begin_inset Newline newline
28617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28637 \begin_inset Index idx
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
28647 \begin_inset Index idx
28650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28653 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
28666 \begin_inset Newline newline
28669 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28670 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28673 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28678 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28686 is the default and preferred because
28690 supports only English documents.
28691 The format is specified by using the command
28703 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28704 preamble of the document.
28705 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28723 \begin_inset Newline newline
28730 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28735 \begin_inset Newline newline
28746 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28747 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28749 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28750 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28755 , you might do so as follows:
28756 \begin_inset Newline newline
28763 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28768 \begin_inset Newline newline
28771 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28772 the package documentation
28775 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28777 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28783 \begin_inset Newline newline
28796 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28803 \begin_layout Description
28807 \begin_inset space ~
28810 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference
28813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28814 LatexCommand nameref
28815 reference "fig:Two-images"
28822 \begin_layout Description
28826 \begin_inset space ~
28829 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28830 label for the reference
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28834 LatexCommand labelonly
28835 reference "fig:Two-images"
28840 \begin_inset Newline newline
28845 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28846 Code, if you want to issue a command
28847 that \SpecialChar LyX
28853 , then you may want to use the
28856 \begin_inset space ~
28861 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28871 This is the form needed for e.
28872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28876 \begin_inset space \space{}
28883 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28884 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28886 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28890 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28894 \begin_layout Standard
28897 You can only use the style
28901 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28905 is always possible.
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28911 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28912 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28914 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28917 \begin_inset space ~
28921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28923 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28930 \begin_layout Standard
28933 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28937 \begin_inset space ~
28941 \begin_inset space ~
28946 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28947 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28950 \begin_inset space ~
28955 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28956 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28961 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28967 \begin_layout Standard
28970 You can change labels at any time.
28971 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28972 do not need to think about this.
28975 \begin_layout Standard
28978 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28980 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28984 \begin_layout Standard
28987 References are described in detail in the section
28988 \begin_inset space ~
28998 \begin_inset space ~
29006 \begin_layout Section
29007 جدول المحتويات والقوائم الأخرى
29008 \begin_inset Index idx
29011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29018 \begin_inset Index idx
29021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29028 \begin_inset Index idx
29031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29047 \begin_layout Subsection
29049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29051 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29058 \begin_layout Standard
29061 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29064 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29066 \begin_inset space ~
29070 \begin_inset space ~
29076 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29078 If you click on it, the
29082 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29083 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29084 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29086 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29088 \begin_inset space ~
29093 that is described in section
29096 \begin_inset space ~
29100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29102 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29112 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29113 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29115 \begin_inset space ~
29119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29121 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29125 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29127 \begin_inset space ~
29131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29133 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29137 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29139 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29142 \begin_layout Subsection
29143 قائمة الصور، الجداول، اللوغاريتمات
29144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29146 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29156 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29158 You can insert them via the
29160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29164 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29167 \begin_layout Section
29168 الروابط والروابط التشعبية
29169 \begin_inset Index idx
29172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29179 \begin_inset Index idx
29182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29191 \begin_layout Subsection
29193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29205 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29213 \begin_layout Standard
29216 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29220 \begin_inset Flex URL
29223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 https://www.lyx.org
29233 \begin_layout Standard
29236 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29242 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29246 \begin_layout Standard
29249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29267 \begin_layout Subsection
29269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29271 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29278 \begin_layout Standard
29281 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29286 or with the toolbar button
29297 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29306 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29307 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this
29310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29312 name "LyX's homepage"
29313 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29320 an Email address like this:
29321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29323 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29324 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29330 , or a link to a file.
29335 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29346 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29359 to the link target.
29362 \begin_layout Standard
29365 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29366 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29367 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29368 the text style dialog.
29369 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29375 name "LyX's homepage"
29376 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29387 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29391 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29400 \begin_inset Newline newline
29408 \begin_inset Newline newline
29415 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29418 \begin_layout Section
29420 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29432 name "sec:Appendices"
29439 \begin_layout Standard
29442 Appendices are created with the menu
29444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29446 \begin_inset space ~
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29456 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29457 as the appendix part of the book.
29458 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29461 \begin_layout Standard
29464 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29465 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29466 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29467 and the subsection number.
29468 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29476 \begin_inset space ~
29480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29482 reference "chap:Credits"
29487 \begin_inset space ~
29491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29493 reference "subsec:Export"
29500 \begin_layout Section
29502 \begin_inset Index idx
29505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29514 name "sec:Bibliography"
29521 \begin_layout Standard
29524 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29526 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29527 \begin_inset space ~
29531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29533 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29540 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29545 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29552 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29557 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29558 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29559 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29563 using a bibliography database.
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29569 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29570 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29574 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29575 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29576 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29577 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29578 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29581 \begin_layout Subsection
29583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29585 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29592 \begin_layout Standard
29599 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29601 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29610 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29612 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29613 of ASCII characters only.
29617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29624 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29630 \begin_inset Newline newline
29634 \begin_inset Flex URL
29637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29639 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29651 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29661 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29662 \begin_inset Newline newline
29669 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29670 the number of the entry.
29675 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29687 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29692 or the toolbar button
29697 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29703 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29704 containing the available citations.
29705 Select one or more keys from the list and
29715 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29716 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29723 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29724 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29725 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29743 Companion Second Edition
29746 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29748 key "latexcompanion"
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29759 The \SpecialChar LyX
29760 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29771 \begin_layout Standard
29774 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29783 \begin_inset Index idx
29786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29795 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29807 Author A and Author B(Year)
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29815 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29817 Then, if you select
29820 \begin_inset space ~
29825 in the document settings
29828 \begin_inset Index idx
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 \begin_inset space ~
29849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29851 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29858 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29864 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29869 \begin_inset space ~
29879 arg "layout-paragraph"
29885 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29888 \begin_layout Subsection
29889 قاعدة بيانات ثبت المراجع
29890 \begin_inset Index idx
29893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29894 ثبت المراجع ! قاعدة البيانات
29900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29902 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29912 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29920 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29922 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29923 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29928 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29930 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29931 your working field in a database.
29932 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29933 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29934 list for that document.
29935 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29942 The database is a text file with the file extension
29943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29954 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29955 The format is explained in
29958 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29967 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29971 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29977 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29978 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29979 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29983 \begin_inset Flex URL
29986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29996 \begin_layout Standard
30000 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30001 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30002 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30004 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30006 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30007 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30008 Those are addressed by
30014 \begin_inset Index idx
30017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30018 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30026 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30027 (although it has been significantly
30028 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30041 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30042 might conversely fail to correctly
30043 handle databases that use specific
30052 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30059 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30064 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30072 \begin_inset Index idx
30075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30095 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30104 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 ثبت المراجع ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30119 \begin_layout Standard
30122 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30130 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30132 \begin_inset space ~
30138 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30139 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30147 Add bibliography to TOC
30149 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30154 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30155 in the document or just the cited references.
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30161 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30162 style file is a text file with the file extension
30163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30174 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30175 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30176 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30177 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30179 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30187 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30188 \begin_inset Newline newline
30192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30194 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30204 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30209 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30213 \begin_layout Standard
30216 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30221 \begin_inset Index idx
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30225 ثبت المراجع ! Biblatex
30231 \begin_inset Index idx
30234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30235 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30243 \begin_layout Standard
30246 Accessing a database via
30250 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30258 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30266 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30267 you cannot select a
30272 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30276 \begin_layout Standard
30282 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30295 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30296 file (text file with the file extension
30297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30308 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30309 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30311 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30321 styles are not set in the
30324 \begin_inset space ~
30329 dialog, but in the document settings
30332 \begin_inset Index idx
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 However, in the dialog in the
30347 field, which is only visible if you use
30351 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30352 example how its heading will appear).
30353 These options are deescribed in detail in the
30358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30371 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30374 \begin_inset space ~
30378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30380 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30394 \begin_layout Standard
30397 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30398 uses a bibliography processor,
30399 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30400 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30401 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30403 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30404 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30410 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30412 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30413 You can do this on a general level in
30415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30416 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30417 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30420 or for individual documents in
30422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30423 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30427 The following variants are available by default:
30430 \begin_layout Description
30433 biber a specific, modern processor
30436 \begin_inset Index idx
30439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30447 developed exclusively for
30451 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30457 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30462 makes use of; if you use the
30466 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30473 \begin_layout Description
30476 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30477 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30478 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30482 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30485 \begin_layout Description
30488 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30489 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30493 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30497 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30501 features are supported.
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30507 By default (with the
30513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30527 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30528 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30529 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30532 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30533 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30546 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30547 -based bibliography styles).
30548 This should suit most needs.
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30554 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30555 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30556 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30561 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30562 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30563 You can adjust it in
30565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30567 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30576 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30577 can add below the selection.
30578 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30579 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30587 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30601 \begin_layout Standard
30605 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30607 These are explained in detail in section
30609 Customizing Bibliographies
30613 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30618 Additional Features
30623 \begin_layout Subsection
30625 \begin_inset Index idx
30628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 ثبت المراجع ! هيئة الاستشهاد
30635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30637 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30647 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30652 \begin_inset space \space{}
30655 numerical citation (as
30656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30663 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30671 ) or author-year citations (as
30672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30681 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30688 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30697 \begin_inset Index idx
30700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30708 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30714 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30715 labels, is there to use
30718 \begin_inset space ~
30729 \begin_inset space ~
30734 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30737 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30744 \begin_layout Standard
30747 With a bibliography database (see
30748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30750 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30757 ) one has in contrary to the
30761 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30762 These style formats are available:
30765 \begin_layout Description
30769 \begin_inset space ~
30772 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30773 -based approached without any additional packages
30774 (simple numeric citations).
30777 \begin_layout Description
30780 Biblatex loads the package
30787 \begin_inset Index idx
30790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
30798 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30800 Biblatex citation style
30804 Biblatex bibliography style
30807 Options to the package
30811 can be entered in the
30818 \begin_layout Description
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30826 \begin_inset space ~
30829 mode) loads the package
30833 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30834 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30846 behavior very closely.
30851 this option has some additional styles.
30856 styles are also supported by this variant.
30859 \begin_layout Description
30863 \begin_inset space ~
30866 (BibTeX) loads the package
30873 \begin_inset Index idx
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
30884 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30887 \begin_layout Description
30891 \begin_inset space ~
30894 (BibTeX) loads the package
30901 \begin_inset Index idx
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30926 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30928 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30937 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30939 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30940 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30942 Biblatex citation style
30945 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30951 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30955 \begin_layout Standard
30958 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30959 are available in the
30964 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30965 a name prefix such as
30966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30981 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30986 \begin_inset space \space{}
30990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31001 \begin_layout Standard
31004 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31010 \begin_inset space \space{}
31013 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31019 \begin_inset space \space{}
31023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31035 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31039 \begin_inset space ~
31047 \begin_inset space ~
31053 Here is a simple example where the text
31054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31058 \begin_inset space ~
31062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31065 appears after the reference:
31068 \begin_layout Quote
31074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31077 key "latexcompanion"
31085 \begin_layout Standard
31088 All styles except for
31092 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31102 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31106 \begin_layout Standard
31109 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31110 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31111 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31116 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31117 multi-citation (so-called
31118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31121 qualified citation lists
31122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31128 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31133 dialog will display three columns in the field
31140 \begin_inset space ~
31148 \begin_inset space ~
31156 \begin_inset space ~
31162 If you double-click on an item's
31165 \begin_inset space ~
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31178 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31181 General text before
31187 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31190 \begin_layout Section
31192 \begin_inset Index idx
31195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31214 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31218 \begin_inset space ~
31223 or the toolbar button
31234 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31235 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31236 by \SpecialChar LyX
31237 as the index entry.
31240 \begin_layout Standard
31243 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31246 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31248 \begin_inset space ~
31254 A light blue box labeled
31255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31266 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31267 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31271 \begin_layout Standard
31274 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31275 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31276 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31277 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31279 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31281 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31289 \begin_layout Subsection
31291 \begin_inset Index idx
31294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31306 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31308 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31309 lists under the entry
31310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31318 First we create the entry
31319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31327 \begin_inset space ~
31331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31333 reference "subsec:Lists"
31338 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31339 \begin_inset space ~
31343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31345 reference "sec:Itemize"
31349 , we insert the command
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31359 \begin_layout Standard
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31375 for the enumerated list in section
31376 \begin_inset space ~
31380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31382 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31389 \begin_layout Standard
31392 The exclamation mark
31393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31400 marks the grouping levels.
31401 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31402 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31403 If we don't have an index entry for
31404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31411 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31414 \begin_layout Subsection
31416 \begin_inset Index idx
31419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31431 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31433 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31434 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31435 an index entry in section
31436 \begin_inset space ~
31440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31442 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31449 \begin_layout Standard
31453 Paragraph environments|(
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31459 and another entry at the end of section
31460 \begin_inset space ~
31464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31466 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31473 \begin_layout Standard
31477 Paragraph environments|)
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31507 respectively start and end the index range.
31508 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31509 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31510 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31511 An example is the index entry
31512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31515 Document ! Settings
31516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31522 \begin_layout Subsection
31524 \begin_inset Index idx
31527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31528 فهرس ! إشارة مرجعية
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31539 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31540 We referred for example in the index entry
31541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31555 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31559 ) to the index entry
31560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31567 in the same section using the entry
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31574 GIF|see{Image formats}
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31580 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31582 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31583 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31586 \begin_layout Subsection
31588 \begin_inset Index idx
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31600 \begin_layout Standard
31603 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31604 follow the rules for the index order.
31605 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31613 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31615 \begin_inset space ~
31619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31621 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31630 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31631 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31668 \begin_inset Index idx
31671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31678 \begin_inset Index idx
31681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31682 مدخل مجسم ! الفا@غاما
31689 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31690 maïs, maison, maître.
31691 To achieve this, we use the command
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31698 previous entry@current entry
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31704 In our case we want to have
31705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31720 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31730 \begin_layout Standard
31733 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31734 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31736 See the next subsection for an example.
31739 \begin_layout Subsection
31741 \begin_inset Index idx
31744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 \begin_layout Standard
31756 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog
31759 \begin_inset Index idx
31762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31765 هذا مدخل مجسم إيطالي
31772 You can also format the page number using the character
31773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31780 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31781 -command without a backslash.
31782 We can write for example
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31788 رقم صفحة إيطالي:|textit
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31794 to get the page number in italic.
31797 \begin_inset Index idx
31800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31801 مدخل مجسم ! ترقيم صفحة إيطالي :|textit
31808 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31809 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31827 \begin_inset space ~
31833 Have a look at section
31834 \begin_inset space ~
31838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31840 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31844 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31848 \begin_layout Standard
31851 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31860 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31864 to generate the index, see section
31865 \begin_inset space ~
31869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31871 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31880 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31885 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31889 key "latexcompanion"
31902 \begin_layout Standard
31905 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31907 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31908 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31909 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31910 If so, put the following in the preamble
31913 \begin_layout Standard
31925 \begin_layout Standard
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31936 \begin_layout Standard
31942 \begin_inset Index idx
31945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31955 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31956 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31957 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31963 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31964 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31965 a bold font for all index entries.
31966 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31978 documentation for details,
31979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31981 key "makeindex,xindy"
31989 \begin_layout Subsection
31991 \begin_inset Index idx
31994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32003 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32013 If the index generation program
32017 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32018 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32022 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32023 distribution, is used.
32027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32033 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32034 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32035 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32036 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32037 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32047 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32049 dialog, see section
32050 \begin_inset space ~
32054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32056 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32061 The available options are listed and explained in
32062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32064 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32070 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32077 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32078 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32086 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32087 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32090 \begin_layout Subsection
32094 \begin_layout Standard
32097 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32098 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32106 next to the standard index.
32108 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32109 that add this feature.
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 حزمة لتيك ! splitidx
32129 package to generate multiple indexes.
32130 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32138 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32148 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32149 style, but it also includes
32150 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32151 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32162 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32163 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32169 and select the option
32171 Use multiple Indexes
32178 already contains the standard index
32179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32187 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32188 also appear as a heading) to the
32192 input field and press the
32197 The new index now also appears in the list.
32198 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32199 label color to the new index.
32202 \begin_layout Standard
32205 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32215 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32216 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32217 are additional features:
32220 \begin_layout Itemize
32223 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32224 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32227 \begin_layout Itemize
32230 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32231 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32236 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32237 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32238 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32239 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32242 \begin_layout Itemize
32249 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32250 code in the name of the index.
32253 \begin_layout Section
32254 المصطلحات/قاموس الكلمات
32255 \begin_inset Index idx
32258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32265 \begin_inset Index idx
32268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32299 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32309 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32310 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32311 called nomenclature or glossary.
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32317 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32325 \begin_inset Index idx
32328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32329 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
32337 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32346 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32350 \begin_layout Standard
32353 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32354 and then use the menu
32356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32362 \begin_inset space ~
32367 or the toolbar button
32372 arg "nomencl-insert"
32379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32390 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32396 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32397 The first is the term or
32401 that you wish to define.
32406 of the term or symbol.
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32421 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32422 code for nomenclature entries the option
32426 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32434 \begin_layout Subsection
32436 \begin_inset Index idx
32439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32451 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32455 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32462 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32470 \begin_inset Newline newline
32478 \begin_inset Newline newline
32484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32491 character starts/ends the formula.
32492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32493 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32505 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32518 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32519 syntax is given in section
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32526 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32539 \begin_inset space ~
32544 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32546 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32551 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32558 in this document is:
32559 \begin_inset Newline newline
32564 dummy entry for the character
32569 \begin_inset Newline newline
32581 \begin_inset space ~
32591 font use the command
32620 \begin_layout Standard
32623 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32628 \begin_inset space \space{}
32632 \begin_inset Newline newline
32648 \begin_inset Newline newline
32651 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32652 This command will make the font of all symbols
32659 \begin_inset space ~
32667 \begin_layout Standard
32670 If the characters |
32671 \begin_inset space \space{}
32675 \begin_inset space \space{}
32679 \begin_inset space \space{}
32683 \begin_inset space \space{}
32687 \begin_inset space \space{}
32690 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32691 code they need to be escaped
32692 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32693 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32694 LatexCommand nomenclature
32695 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32696 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32704 \begin_layout Subsection
32705 فرز وترتيب المصطلحات
32706 \begin_inset Index idx
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32718 \begin_layout Standard
32721 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32722 -code of the symbol
32724 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32726 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32729 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32730 LatexCommand nomenclature
32732 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32740 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32744 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32745 LatexCommand nomenclature
32748 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32754 They will be sorted by
32755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32781 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32784 will be sorted before the
32788 since the character
32789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32796 is considered in sorting.
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32802 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32805 \begin_inset space ~
32810 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32811 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32813 For the example given, you can insert
32817 in this field for the
32818 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32825 will be located before
32826 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32835 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32840 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32850 \begin_layout Subsection
32852 \begin_inset Index idx
32855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32864 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32878 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32879 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32882 \begin_layout Description
32885 refeq Appends the phrase
32886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32901 to every nomenclature entry, where
32907 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32910 \begin_layout Description
32913 refpage Appends the phrase
32914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32929 to every nomenclature entry, where
32935 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32938 \begin_layout Description
32941 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32947 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32948 class options list in the
32950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32954 In this document the options
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32971 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32972 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32977 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32980 \begin_layout Description
32992 \begin_layout Description
32997 nomrefpage Like the
33004 \begin_layout Description
33009 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33018 \begin_layout Description
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33030 \begin_inset space ~
33035 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33049 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33050 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33054 \begin_layout Standard
33064 \begin_inset Newline newline
33070 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 \begin_inset space ~
33088 unskip, see equation
33091 \begin_inset Newline newline
33098 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33099 \begin_inset Newline newline
33105 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33131 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33139 in the document settings under
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33150 \begin_layout Standard
33159 \begin_inset Newline newline
33163 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33169 \begin_inset space ~
33181 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33183 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33184 \begin_inset Newline newline
33191 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33192 \begin_inset Newline newline
33196 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33214 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33219 \begin_layout Subsection
33221 \begin_inset Index idx
33224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33233 \begin_layout Standard
33236 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33239 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33255 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33256 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33257 You can choose between these settings:
33260 \begin_layout Description
33261 افتراضي المسافة المستخدمة 1
33262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33268 \begin_layout Description
33270 \begin_inset space ~
33274 \begin_inset space ~
33277 طويل the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33280 \begin_layout Description
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33287 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33296 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33304 For example, in order to change the name to
33308 , add the following line to the preamble:
33311 \begin_layout Standard
33325 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33331 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33332 \begin_inset Newline newline
33347 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33350 \begin_layout Subsection
33352 \begin_inset Index idx
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33364 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33371 \begin_layout Standard
33379 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33380 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33382 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33387 by adding options, see section
33388 \begin_inset space ~
33392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33394 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33399 The available options are listed and explained in
33400 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33402 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33410 \begin_layout Section
33412 \begin_inset Index idx
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33422 \begin_inset Index idx
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33434 name "sec:Branches"
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33444 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33445 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33446 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33447 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33453 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33454 allows you to put text into branches.
33455 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33456 To create a branch, either select the menu
33458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33459 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33471 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33472 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33473 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33474 and whether the name of the branch should
33475 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33476 (see below for an example).
33477 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33478 to the name of the other) and to add
33479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33491 \begin_inset space ~
33494 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33495 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33498 \begin_layout Standard
33501 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33502 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33507 where you can choose a branch.
33508 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33515 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33516 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33522 \begin_inset Branch Question
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33531 من هو أول فيزيائي يفوز بجازة نوبل؟
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33542 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33551 وليام كونراد رونتجن.
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33572 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33573 Consider for example a file
33574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33581 which has the above branches.
33583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33590 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33614 branch were inactive,
33615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33630 branch was active, likewise
33631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33646 branch was active, and
33647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33650 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33654 if both branches were active.
33655 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33656 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33662 \begin_layout Standard
33665 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33671 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33672 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33676 \begin_inset space ~
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33687 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33705 branch is deactivated.
33711 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33720 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33721 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33722 definitions for each branch.
33723 For example you can define for the question branch
33727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33730 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33731 -syntax, see section
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33738 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33750 \begin_layout Standard
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33772 \begin_layout Standard
33775 and for the answer branch
33778 \begin_layout Standard
33789 \begin_layout Standard
33800 \begin_layout Standard
33803 \begin_inset Branch Question
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33841 \begin_layout Standard
33844 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33848 \begin_layout Standard
33854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33882 \begin_layout Standard
33885 Now it is possible to use the
33889 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33896 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33899 commands to obtain conditional output.
33900 Here is an example formula where only the
33909 \begin_inset Formula
33911 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33919 \begin_layout Standard
33922 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33930 \begin_layout Standard
33933 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33939 \begin_inset space \space{}
33942 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33944 For this advanced usage, see the
33950 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33955 \begin_layout Section
33957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33959 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33964 \begin_inset Index idx
33967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33985 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33987 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33995 \begin_inset Index idx
33998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
34006 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34007 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34008 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34009 part of the document.
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34016 The header information in the dialog tab
34020 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34021 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34022 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34023 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34036 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34037 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34038 and author entries.
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34046 \begin_inset space ~
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34055 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34058 \begin_layout Standard
34061 You can specify in the dialog tab
34065 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34070 \begin_inset space ~
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34078 \begin_inset space ~
34083 option allows long links to be split;
34086 \begin_inset space ~
34090 \begin_inset space ~
34094 \begin_inset space ~
34102 \begin_inset space ~
34107 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34115 colors the different links.
34116 The default colors are:
34119 \begin_layout Labeling
34120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34125 للروابط والروابط التشعبية
34128 \begin_layout Labeling
34129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34137 \begin_layout Labeling
34138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34149 but you can change these in the field
34154 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34161 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34164 \begin_layout Standard
34171 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34172 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34173 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34183 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34184 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34185 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34195 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34196 when opening the PDF.
34198 \begin_inset space ~
34201 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34205 1 will only display the sections.
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34211 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34212 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34218 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34219 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34229 \begin_layout Section
34230 كود تيك وتراكيب لتيك
34231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34233 name "sec:TeX-Code-1"
34240 \begin_layout Subsection
34242 \begin_inset Index idx
34245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34254 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34261 \begin_layout Standard
34264 As \SpecialChar LyX
34265 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34266 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34267 commands and constructs,
34270 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34271 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34272 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34273 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34274 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34275 cannot support all packages and
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34282 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34283 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34284 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34288 Code box is created by the menu
34290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34292 \begin_inset space ~
34297 or by the toolbar button
34318 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34326 \begin_layout Standard
34329 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34331 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34333 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34340 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34345 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34352 , you can write the command part
34358 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34359 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34363 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34364 Code box behind the word.
34365 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34366 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 \begin_inset Graphics
34372 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34426 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34427 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34428 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34429 know that the command is finished.
34437 \begin_layout Subsection
34438 مدخل قصير لتراكيب لتيك
34439 \begin_inset Argument 1
34442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34449 \begin_inset Index idx
34452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34461 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34471 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34472 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34473 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34474 uses in the background.
34475 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34476 is based on commands, you can
34477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34485 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34486 any time if you know the right commands.
34487 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34488 is the end of the day.
34489 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34490 all caption labels bold.
34491 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34493 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34497 \begin_layout Standard
34500 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34502 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34504 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34520 As result you find that the package
34527 \begin_inset Index idx
34530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34531 حزمة لتيك ! caption
34539 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34544 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34556 \begin_layout Standard
34562 usepackage[options]{package name}
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34568 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34569 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34570 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34571 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34577 In your case the package name is
34582 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34587 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34588 So you add the command
34591 \begin_layout Standard
34597 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34603 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34610 For more commands provided by the
34614 package, have a look at its documentation,
34615 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34633 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34635 For example if you use a
34639 class, you don't need the package
34643 , you can instead write
34646 \begin_layout Standard
34652 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34660 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34661 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34662 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34669 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34672 \begin_layout Standard
34675 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34676 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34678 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34679 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34680 Code box as described in the previous
34684 \begin_layout Standard
34687 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34688 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34691 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34693 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34704 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34710 \begin_layout Standard
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34726 \begin_inset Note Note
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34732 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34740 \begin_layout Left Header
34741 \begin_inset Argument 1
34744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34766 \begin_inset Note Note
34769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34772 defines the header line as described below
34780 \begin_layout Center Header
34781 \begin_inset Argument 1
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34793 \begin_layout Right Header
34794 \begin_inset Argument 1
34797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 \begin_layout Left Footer
34821 \begin_inset Argument 1
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 \begin_layout Center Footer
34848 \begin_inset Argument 1
34851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34866 \begin_inset Newline newline
34872 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34878 \begin_layout Right Footer
34879 \begin_inset Argument 1
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34904 \begin_layout Section
34905 تخصيص رأس وتذييل الصفحات
34906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34908 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34913 \begin_inset Index idx
34916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34917 مستند ! سطر رأس/تذييل
34923 \begin_inset Index idx
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34935 \begin_layout Standard
34938 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34942 \begin_inset space ~
34953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34959 \begin_inset space ~
34965 As a second step add in the menu
34967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34968 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34977 Custom Header/Footerlines
34980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34984 This module offers the following 6
34985 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_layout Description
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35017 \begin_layout Description
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35025 \begin_inset space ~
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset space ~
35037 \begin_inset space ~
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35046 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35047 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35050 \begin_layout Standard
35053 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35054 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35056 \begin_inset space ~
35060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35062 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35066 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 \begin_inset Float figure
35076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35079 \begin_inset Tabular
35080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35082 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35084 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35104 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35115 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35139 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35153 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35157 The normal text on the page goes here.
35158 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35160 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35161 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35166 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35175 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35190 \begin_inset space ~
35198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35210 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35242 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35260 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35265 name "fig:Page-layout"
35269 نسق الصفحة مع تخصيص الرأس والتذييل.
35282 \begin_layout Standard
35285 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35294 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35303 is set to “Default”.
35304 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35313 \begin_layout Subsection
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35320 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35321 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35322 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35323 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35325 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35327 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35333 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35334 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35348 \begin_layout Description
35351 thepage طباعة رقم الصفحة الحالية
35354 \begin_layout Description
35357 Roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية كبيرة
35360 \begin_layout Description
35363 roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية صغيرة
35366 \begin_layout Description
35371 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35372 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35379 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35382 because it usually goes in a left header.
35385 \begin_layout Description
35390 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35391 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35393 It is normally used in the right header.
35396 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 الرأس/التذييل الافتراضي
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35403 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35404 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35405 footer has the page number.
35406 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35407 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35408 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35419 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 \begin_layout Standard
35426 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35427 Some pages are different.
35428 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35429 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35430 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35431 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35432 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35436 خط الزخرفة في الرأس والتذييل
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35442 By default, you get a 0.4
35443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35446 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35447 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35459 in the following way:
35462 \begin_layout Standard
35470 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35473 \begin_layout Standard
35476 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35489 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35496 \begin_layout Standard
35499 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35501 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35502 \begin_inset space ~
35506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35517 عدة أسطر في الرأس والتذييل
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35523 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35524 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35525 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35527 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35553 \begin_layout Standard
35561 headheight}{height}
35564 \begin_layout Standard
35571 is a size in standard units (e.
35572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35576 \begin_inset space \space{}
35584 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35585 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35586 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35587 logfile with the menu
35589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35604 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35611 \begin_inset Index idx
35614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35615 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
35623 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35624 for your header/footer.
35627 \begin_layout Subsection
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35634 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35635 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35636 This example consists of the following definition:
35639 \begin_layout Description
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35652 , empty optional argument
35655 \begin_layout Description
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35662 Header empty, empty optional argument
35665 \begin_layout Description
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35678 in the optional argument
35681 \begin_layout Description
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35694 in the optional argument
35697 \begin_layout Description
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35718 \begin_inset Newline newline
35722 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35729 in the optional argument
35732 \begin_layout Description
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35745 , empty optional argument
35748 \begin_layout Description
35753 headrulewidth set to 2
35754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35763 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35764 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35780 \begin_layout Standard
35783 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35789 \begin_layout Standard
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35799 pagestyle{headings}
35805 \begin_inset Note Note
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35811 switches back to page style with the default headings
35819 \begin_layout Section
35820 استعراض مقتطفات من مستندك
35821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35823 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35828 \begin_inset Index idx
35831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35838 \begin_inset Index idx
35841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35854 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35855 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35856 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35859 \begin_layout Subsection
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35866 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35874 \begin_inset Index idx
35877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35878 حزمة لتيك ! preview-latex
35885 (on some systems named simply
35890 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35899 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35901 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35909 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35910 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35911 -package are automatically
35912 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35916 \begin_layout Subsection
35920 \begin_layout Standard
35923 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35924 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35926 activate the option
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35936 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35949 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35974 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35977 \begin_layout Standard
35980 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_layout Standard
36004 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36005 and when you finish
36009 \begin_layout Standard
36012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36021 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36022 generated by activating the option
36025 \begin_inset space ~
36031 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36039 \begin_layout Subsection
36040 تحديد أجزاء المستند
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36046 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36047 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36048 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36049 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36051 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36057 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36058 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36059 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36062 \begin_layout Standard
36065 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36072 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36085 is explained in section
36087 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36102 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36103 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36104 the final rotated boxes,
36105 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36106 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36108 Here is the result:
36111 \begin_layout Standard
36114 \begin_inset Preview
36116 \begin_layout Standard
36121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36125 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36131 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36141 height_special "totalheight"
36146 backgroundcolor "none"
36149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36174 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36180 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36205 Previewing works also for colors.
36206 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 is explained in section
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36246 \begin_layout Standard
36249 \begin_inset Preview
36251 \begin_layout Standard
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36301 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36310 If \SpecialChar LyX
36311 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36312 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36313 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36314 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36315 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36316 the \SpecialChar TeX
36318 If \SpecialChar LyX
36319 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36320 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36322 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36323 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36324 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36327 \begin_layout Subsection
36328 كود \SpecialChar LaTeX
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36335 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36336 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36339 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36346 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36348 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36350 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36351 's main window, then only this selection
36352 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36353 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36354 the source view window.
36359 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36360 ; but note that if you have
36361 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36363 not just the one which is open at the time.
36366 \begin_layout Section
36367 البحث والاستبدال المتقدم
36368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36370 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36375 \begin_inset Index idx
36378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36385 \begin_inset Index idx
36388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36397 \begin_layout Subsection
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36404 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36405 allows for searching of complex,
36406 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36408 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36409 The key-features are:
36412 \begin_layout Itemize
36415 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36416 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36417 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36421 \begin_layout Itemize
36424 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36425 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36426 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36427 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36430 \begin_layout Itemize
36433 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36434 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36435 outside of mathematics environments
36438 \begin_layout Itemize
36441 Search may be widened to a specific
36446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36453 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36454 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36461 \begin_layout Itemize
36464 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36465 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36473 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36476 \begin_layout Subsection
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36483 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36500 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36505 ) or the toolbar button
36510 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36518 Advanced Find and Replace
36523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36535 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36544 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36549 arg "paragraph-break"
36555 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36556 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36562 arg "paragraph-break"
36567 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36571 searches backwards.
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36585 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36599 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36609 Mathematical formulas, such as
36610 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36613 or something more complex like
36614 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36617 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36622 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36623 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36624 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36625 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36638 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36639 This is done by switching to the
36643 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36648 This way, entering in the
36655 \begin_layout Itemize
36658 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36659 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36662 \begin_layout Itemize
36665 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36666 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36669 \begin_layout Itemize
36672 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36673 of it only within section headings.
36674 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36675 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36679 \begin_layout Itemize
36682 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36683 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36690 \begin_layout Standard
36693 The entries made in the
36697 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36700 \begin_inset space ~
36706 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36710 button or alternatively press
36715 arg "paragraph-break"
36724 while the cursor is in the
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36738 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36740 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36744 \begin_layout Itemize
36747 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36748 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36756 with its typewriter version
36757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36771 \begin_layout Itemize
36774 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36780 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36792 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36799 (you may want to enable the
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36815 options and disable the
36823 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36831 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36832 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36836 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36839 , or occurrences of
36840 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36844 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36850 \begin_layout Subsection
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36857 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36864 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36866 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36868 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36878 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36884 This is done with the context menu
36886 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36887 Insert Regular Expression
36889 while the cursor is in the
36894 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36895 expression matching rules
36899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36909 \begin_inset space ~
36912 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36913 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36919 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36920 same text in the document.
36921 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36922 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36925 \begin_layout Enumerate
36928 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36933 editor the fraction
36934 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36938 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36941 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36942 fractions with the given denominator.
36945 \begin_layout Enumerate
36948 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36960 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36965 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36966 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36967 Also, by inserting a
36968 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36971 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36972 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36979 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36980 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36983 , and referring back to them through
36984 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36988 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36992 For example, try searching with the regexp
36993 \begin_inset Newline newline
36996 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36999 \begin_inset Newline newline
37002 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37005 \begin_layout Standard
37008 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37011 \begin_layout Standard
37014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37023 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37024 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37025 sub-expressions is absolute.
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37031 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37034 always refers to the first occurrence of
37035 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37038 in all entered regexps.
37046 \begin_layout Section
37048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37050 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37055 \begin_inset Index idx
37058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37071 has a built-in spell checker.
37074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37081 key or the toolbar button
37086 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37091 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37092 beginning of the currently selected text.
37093 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37094 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37095 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37096 scrolled so that it is visible.
37097 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37098 n, if any could be found.
37099 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37103 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37104 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37110 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37117 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37118 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37120 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37121 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37134 arg "dialog-show character"
37139 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37141 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37144 \begin_layout Standard
37147 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37148 can be downloaded from here:
37149 \begin_inset Newline newline
37153 \begin_inset Flex URL
37156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37164 \begin_inset Newline newline
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37171 files for each language.
37172 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37176 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37177 's installation subfolder
37185 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37187 \begin_inset Newline newline
37190 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37191 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37192 but in most cases these are
37208 is the language code.
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37212 المزيد من الإعدادات
37215 \begin_layout Standard
37220 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37221 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37223 \begin_inset space ~
37226 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37229 you can set the following things:
37232 \begin_layout Description
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37239 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37240 should use for spell checking.
37241 Depending on your platform,
37251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37254 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37255 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37273 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37276 \begin_layout Description
37280 \begin_inset space ~
37283 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37284 will always use the given language
37285 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37288 \begin_layout Description
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37295 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37301 \begin_inset space \space{}
37305 This should normally not be needed.
37308 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37319 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37331 \begin_layout Description
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37338 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37339 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37340 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37341 appear in a context menu.
37342 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37346 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37361 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37365 \begin_layout Section
37367 \begin_inset Index idx
37370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37379 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37390 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37391 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37405 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37415 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37417 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37418 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37419 which are available for many languages.
37422 \begin_layout Standard
37425 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37426 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37430 \begin_layout Subsection
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37445 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37449 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37454 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37468 For instance, the US English files are named:
37471 \begin_layout Itemize
37477 \begin_layout Itemize
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37494 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37495 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37499 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37500 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37507 ) to the path where they are installed.
37511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37514 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37515 ies, typical locations are
37521 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37525 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37529 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37532 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37538 LibreOffice-<Version>
37545 On the Mac, the default location is
37547 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37548 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37549 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37550 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37551 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37552 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37560 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37561 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37562 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37566 \begin_layout Standard
37569 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37570 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37572 \begin_inset Newline newline
37576 \begin_inset Flex URL
37579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37581 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37592 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37593 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37595 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37596 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37604 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37606 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37607 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37614 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37616 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37619 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37625 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37628 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37629 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37637 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37639 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37646 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37649 \begin_layout Subsection
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37656 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37661 or the toolbar button
37666 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37671 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37673 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37675 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37676 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37677 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37686 ), related terms (such as
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37698 ), compounds (such as
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37710 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37719 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37722 \begin_layout Standard
37725 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37726 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37730 \begin_layout Standard
37733 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37734 the dictionary, such as the above
37738 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37743 \begin_inset space \space{}
37746 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37747 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37748 For example, looking up the word form
37752 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37757 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37762 \begin_inset space \space{}
37773 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37774 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37775 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37778 \begin_layout Section
37780 \begin_inset Index idx
37783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37790 \begin_inset Index idx
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37794 مستند ! سجل التعديلات
37800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37802 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37809 \begin_layout Standard
37812 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37813 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37814 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37815 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37822 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37832 \begin_layout Standard
37835 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37849 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37850 You can change the color in
37852 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37859 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37871 \begin_inset Index idx
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 لون ! سجل التعديلات
37882 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37883 's status bar when the
37884 cursor is in changed text.
37885 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37890 arg "changes-merge"
37896 \begin_layout Standard
37899 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37903 \begin_inset Index idx
37906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37907 شريط أدوات ! مراجعة
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 \begin_inset Graphics
37924 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37932 \begin_layout Standard
37933 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37942 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37948 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 \begin_inset Tabular
37956 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37957 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37958 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37959 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 arg "changes-track"
37977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37989 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 \begin_inset space ~
38000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38009 arg "changes-output"
38017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38029 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38071 Jumps to the next change
38077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 arg "change-accept"
38094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38106 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38126 arg "change-reject"
38134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38146 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 arg "changes-merge"
38174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38183 \begin_inset space ~
38186 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38188 \begin_inset space ~
38197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38206 arg "all-changes-accept"
38214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38223 \begin_inset space ~
38226 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38228 \begin_inset space ~
38232 \begin_inset space ~
38241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 arg "all-changes-reject"
38258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38270 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38272 \begin_inset space ~
38276 \begin_inset space ~
38285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38310 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38312 \begin_inset space ~
38321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38345 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38363 \begin_layout Standard
38366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38375 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38395 \begin_layout Standard
38398 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38399 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38400 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38401 the next change after the current cursor position.
38402 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38403 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38404 step to the next change.
38405 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38411 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38412 to describe a change.
38415 \begin_layout Standard
38418 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38426 \begin_inset Index idx
38429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 حزمة لتيك ! dvipost
38438 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38447 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38451 \begin_layout Section
38453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38455 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38460 \begin_inset Index idx
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38472 \begin_layout Standard
38475 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38482 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38483 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38485 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38487 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_inset space ~
38508 \begin_inset space ~
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38533 enables the change tracking option
38536 \begin_inset space ~
38540 \begin_inset space ~
38544 \begin_inset space ~
38549 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38552 \begin_layout Section
38554 \begin_inset Index idx
38557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 \begin_layout Standard
38569 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38570 with any language you want.
38571 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38572 up \SpecialChar LyX
38574 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38576 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38587 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38588 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38589 \begin_inset space ~
38593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38595 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38602 \begin_layout Subsection
38604 \begin_inset Index idx
38607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38614 \begin_inset Index idx
38617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 \begin_inset Index idx
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 \begin_layout Standard
38641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38642 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38645 dialog lets you set
38647 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38652 \begin_layout Standard
38659 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38669 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38670 For details about the different encoding options see section
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38677 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38684 \begin_layout Subsection
38685 ضبط خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
38686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38688 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38695 \begin_layout Standard
38698 If you have for example a U.
38699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38702 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38703 can use an alternate keymap.
38704 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38709 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38710 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38711 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38714 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38721 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38726 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38727 which one you want to use.
38730 \begin_layout Standard
38733 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38734 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38735 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38739 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38740 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38741 one to support the characters you want.
38742 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38749 \begin_layout Chapter
38752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38754 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38761 \begin_layout Standard
38764 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38765 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38766 topic inside the user's guide.
38769 \begin_layout Section
38771 \begin_inset Index idx
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 \begin_layout Standard
38790 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38793 \begin_layout Subsection
38797 \begin_layout Standard
38800 Creates a new document.
38803 \begin_layout Subsection
38807 \begin_layout Standard
38810 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38811 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38812 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38815 \begin_layout Subsection
38819 \begin_layout Standard
38825 \begin_layout Subsection
38829 \begin_layout Standard
38832 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38833 Click there on a file to open it.
38836 \begin_layout Subsection
38840 \begin_layout Standard
38843 Closes the current document.
38846 \begin_layout Subsection
38850 \begin_layout Standard
38853 Closes all opened documents.
38856 \begin_layout Subsection
38860 \begin_layout Standard
38863 Saves the actual document.
38866 \begin_layout Subsection
38870 \begin_layout Standard
38873 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38876 \begin_layout Subsection
38880 \begin_layout Standard
38883 Saves all opened documents.
38886 \begin_layout Subsection
38890 \begin_layout Standard
38893 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38896 \begin_layout Subsection
38900 \begin_layout Standard
38903 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38904 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38905 It is described in the section
38907 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38912 Additional Features
38917 \begin_layout Subsection
38921 \begin_layout Standard
38924 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38925 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38927 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38928 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38932 \begin_layout Standard
38935 When using the menu entry
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38943 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38947 \begin_inset space ~
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38960 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38961 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38964 \begin_layout Subsection
38966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38968 name "subsec:Export"
38975 \begin_layout Standard
38978 You can export your document to various file formats.
38979 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38981 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38982 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38983 during its configuration.
38986 \begin_layout Standard
38989 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38991 \begin_inset space ~
38995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38997 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39004 \begin_layout Description
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39019 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39020 \begin_inset Newline newline
39023 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39024 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39028 \begin_layout Description
39031 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39037 \begin_layout Description
39041 \begin_inset space ~
39044 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39050 \begin_layout Description
39053 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39054 's native DVI-format.
39055 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39056 files paths or file names in your document.
39058 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39065 \begin_layout Description
39068 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
39069 in files paths or file names
39072 \begin_layout Description
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39083 ) DVI-format using the program
39085 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39088 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39092 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39101 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39109 \begin_layout Description
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39116 (cropped) the same as
39120 but with cropped page margins.
39123 \begin_layout Description
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39130 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39134 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39139 \begin_layout Description
39145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39162 \begin_layout Description
39166 \begin_inset space ~
39170 \begin_inset space ~
39173 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39177 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39185 \begin_layout Description
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39199 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39200 source that is compilable with the program
39202 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39206 \begin_layout Description
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39216 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39217 source, additionally all images used in the document
39218 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39222 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39225 \begin_layout Description
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39235 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39236 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39237 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39245 \begin_layout Description
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39259 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39260 source that is compilable with the program
39266 \begin_layout Description
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39281 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39282 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39288 \begin_layout Description
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39295 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39296 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39302 \begin_inset space \space{}
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39326 represent the version number)
39329 \begin_layout Description
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39340 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39341 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39342 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39346 \begin_layout Description
39349 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39350 's internal XHTML engine
39353 \begin_layout Description
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39361 \begin_inset space ~
39365 \begin_inset space ~
39369 \begin_inset space ~
39372 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39377 For the conversion the program
39386 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39389 \begin_layout Description
39392 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39397 \begin_layout Description
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39404 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39406 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39409 For the conversion the program
39418 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39421 \begin_layout Description
39425 \begin_inset space ~
39428 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39429 For the conversion the program
39438 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39441 \begin_layout Description
39445 \begin_inset space ~
39448 (cropped) the same as
39451 \begin_inset space ~
39456 but with cropped page margins
39459 \begin_layout Description
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39469 PDF-format using the program
39473 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39476 \begin_layout Description
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39485 \begin_inset space ~
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39498 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39503 \begin_inset space \space{}
39506 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39510 \begin_layout Description
39515 \begin_inset space ~
39520 PDF-format using the program
39522 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39525 , produces PDF-files directly
39528 \begin_layout Description
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39538 PDF-format using the program
39542 , produces PDF-files directly
39545 \begin_layout Description
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39555 PDF-format using the program
39559 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39562 \begin_layout Description
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39572 PDF-format using the program
39577 , produces PDF-files directly
39580 \begin_layout Description
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39593 \begin_layout Description
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39602 \begin_inset space ~
39607 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39608 and then exported as text using the program
39613 \begin_layout Description
39619 PostScript format using the program
39627 options see section
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39634 reference "subsec:General-output"
39641 \begin_layout Description
39644 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39645 source and also code in the statistical programming
39659 it is possible to use
39663 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39670 If one of the menu entries
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39686 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39688 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39692 \begin_inset space ~
39696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39698 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39703 \begin_inset Index idx
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39715 \begin_layout Subsection
39719 \begin_layout Standard
39722 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39723 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39732 reference "sec:Paths"
39737 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39746 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39747 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39748 's preferences as described in section
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39755 reference "subsec:Converters"
39762 \begin_layout Subsection
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39769 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39773 \begin_layout Subsection
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39780 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39783 \begin_layout Section
39785 \begin_inset Index idx
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 \begin_layout Subsection
39801 \begin_layout Standard
39804 Described in section
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39811 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39818 \begin_layout Subsection
39819 قص، نسخ، لصق، آخر لصق، لصق خاص
39822 \begin_layout Standard
39825 Described in section
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39832 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39839 \begin_layout Subsection
39843 \begin_layout Standard
39846 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39847 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39850 \begin_layout Subsection
39854 \begin_layout Standard
39857 Selects the whole document.
39860 \begin_layout Subsection
39861 بحث & استبدال (سريع)
39864 \begin_layout Standard
39867 Described in section
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39874 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39881 \begin_layout Subsection
39882 بحث & استبدال (متقدم)
39885 \begin_layout Standard
39888 Described in section
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39895 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39902 \begin_layout Subsection
39903 نقل الفقرة للأعلى/الأسفل
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39909 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39913 \begin_layout Subsection
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39920 Described in section
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39927 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39934 \begin_layout Subsection
39936 \begin_inset Index idx
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39951 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39952 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39959 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39960 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_layout Subsection
39978 الجدول و الصفوف & الأعمدة
39981 \begin_layout Standard
39984 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39985 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39986 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39989 \begin_layout Subsection
39993 \begin_layout Standard
39996 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39997 It will dissolve this inset.
39998 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40002 \begin_layout Subsection
40006 \begin_layout Standard
40009 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40010 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40013 \begin_layout Subsection
40014 زيادة/إنقاص عمق القائمة
40017 \begin_layout Standard
40020 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40022 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "sec:Nesting"
40034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40036 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40043 \begin_layout Section
40045 \begin_inset Index idx
40048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40060 At the bottom of the
40064 menu the opened documents are listed.
40067 \begin_layout Subsection
40068 فتح/إغلاق كل المدرجات
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40074 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40077 \begin_layout Subsection
40078 طي/عدم طي ماكرو الرياضيات
40081 \begin_layout Standard
40084 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40090 Math macros are described in the
40097 \begin_layout Subsection
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40104 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40111 reference "sec:Navigating"
40116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40118 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40125 \begin_layout Subsection
40126 نافذة الكود المصدري
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40132 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40140 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40147 \begin_layout Subsection
40151 \begin_layout Standard
40154 Opens a window showing console messages.
40155 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40160 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40161 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40162 is processing the document.
40165 \begin_layout Subsection
40167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40169 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40189 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40191 All toolbars and the
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40199 can be turned on and off.
40204 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40233 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40237 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40244 \begin_layout Standard
40251 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40255 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40256 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40257 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40258 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40259 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40262 \begin_layout Standard
40266 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40273 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40280 \begin_layout Subsection
40284 \begin_layout Standard
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40314 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40315 's main window vertically while
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40343 will split it horizontally.
40344 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40345 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40346 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40347 three or more documents at the same time.
40348 To close a split view, use the menu
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40363 \begin_layout Subsection
40367 \begin_layout Standard
40370 Closes a split view.
40373 \begin_layout Subsection
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40380 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40381 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40382 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40383 's main window fullscreen.
40384 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40385 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40388 \begin_layout Section
40390 \begin_inset Index idx
40393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40402 \begin_layout Subsection
40406 \begin_layout Standard
40409 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40416 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40427 \begin_layout Subsection
40429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40431 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40441 Here you can insert the following characters:
40444 \begin_layout Description
40451 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40454 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40455 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40456 -packages you have installed.
40457 You can get a complete display by checking
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40466 \begin_inset Newline newline
40470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 Not all characters will be visible in the
40483 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40484 dialog (see section
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40495 ) can display every character.
40503 \begin_layout Description
40506 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40510 \begin_layout Description
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40521 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40528 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40535 \begin_layout Description
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40542 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40552 \begin_layout Description
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40559 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40569 \begin_layout Description
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40576 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40580 \begin_layout Description
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40587 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40591 \begin_layout Description
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40598 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40604 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40610 \begin_layout Description
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40617 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40621 \begin_layout Description
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset Index idx
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40641 \begin_inset Index idx
40644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40653 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40655 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 \begin_inset Index idx
40666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40675 \begin_inset Newline newline
40678 More information about this feature can be found in the
40684 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40690 \begin_layout Description
40693 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40695 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40696 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40700 \begin_layout Subsection
40704 \begin_layout Standard
40707 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40710 \begin_layout Description
40713 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40714 \begin_inset script superscript
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40727 \begin_layout Description
40730 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40731 \begin_inset script subscript
40733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40744 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40751 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40758 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40765 \begin_layout Description
40769 \begin_inset space ~
40772 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40779 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40786 \begin_layout Description
40790 \begin_inset space ~
40793 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40800 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40807 \begin_layout Description
40811 \begin_inset space ~
40814 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40820 \begin_inset space \space{}
40823 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40824 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40833 To insert a fraction use the command
40838 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40842 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40851 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40858 \begin_layout Description
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40865 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40872 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40879 \begin_layout Description
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40886 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40893 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40900 \begin_layout Description
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40907 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40914 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40921 \begin_layout Description
40924 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40931 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40938 \begin_layout Description
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40945 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40952 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40959 \begin_layout Description
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40966 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40973 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40980 \begin_layout Description
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40991 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40994 \begin_inset space ~
40998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41000 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41007 for a usage example.
41010 \begin_layout Description
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41021 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41028 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41035 \begin_layout Description
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41042 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
41043 as described in section
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41050 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41057 \begin_layout Description
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41064 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41071 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41078 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41085 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41086 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41094 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41101 \begin_layout Description
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41108 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41115 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41122 \begin_layout Description
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41133 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41140 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41147 \begin_layout Subsection
41148 قائمة/جدول المحتويات
41151 \begin_layout Standard
41154 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41179 are described in section
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41186 reference "sec:toc"
41195 is described in section
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41202 reference "sec:Index"
41210 is described in section
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41217 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41223 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41226 is described in section
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41233 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41240 \begin_layout Subsection
41244 \begin_layout Standard
41247 To insert floats, as described in section
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41254 reference "sec:Floats"
41258 and in detail the chapter
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_layout Subsection
41277 \begin_layout Standard
41280 To insert notes, described in section
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41287 reference "sec:Notes"
41294 \begin_layout Subsection
41298 \begin_layout Standard
41301 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41303 Branches are described in section
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41310 reference "sec:Branches"
41317 \begin_layout Subsection
41321 \begin_layout Standard
41324 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41325 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41327 An example is the document class
41328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41335 with three custom insets.
41338 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41342 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41348 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41351 \begin_layout Subsection
41353 \begin_inset Index idx
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41368 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41370 For more information see chapter
41372 External Document Parts
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41381 \begin_layout Subsection
41383 \begin_inset Index idx
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 \begin_layout Standard
41398 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41399 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_layout Subsection
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41425 dialog as described in section
41426 \begin_inset space ~
41430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41432 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41439 \begin_layout Subsection
41443 \begin_layout Standard
41450 as described in section
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41457 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41464 \begin_layout Subsection
41468 \begin_layout Standard
41475 as described in section
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41482 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41489 \begin_layout Subsection
41491 \begin_inset Index idx
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41501 \begin_inset Index idx
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 جداول ! صفحات متعددة ! تعليق
41513 \begin_layout Standard
41516 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41517 Floats are described in section
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41524 reference "sec:Floats"
41528 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41530 Multi-page Captions
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_layout Subsection
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41550 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41557 reference "sec:Index"
41564 \begin_layout Subsection
41568 \begin_layout Standard
41571 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41578 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41585 \begin_layout Subsection
41589 \begin_layout Standard
41592 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41593 Tables are described in section
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41600 reference "sec:Tables"
41604 and in detail in the chapter
41611 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_layout Subsection
41623 \begin_layout Standard
41631 Graphics are described in section
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41638 reference "sec:Graphics"
41645 \begin_layout Subsection
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41652 Inserts a URL as described in section
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41659 reference "subsec:URLs"
41666 \begin_layout Subsection
41670 \begin_layout Standard
41673 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41680 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41687 \begin_layout Subsection
41691 \begin_layout Standard
41694 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41701 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41708 \begin_layout Subsection
41712 \begin_layout Standard
41715 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41722 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41729 \begin_layout Subsection
41730 فاصل <اسم> (أعلى/أسفل)
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41736 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41737 environments of the same type.
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41745 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41749 for an explanation.
41752 \begin_layout Subsection
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41759 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41760 title or caption of a float.
41761 Inserts a short title as described in section
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41768 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41775 \begin_layout Subsection
41776 كود لتيكس \SpecialChar TeX
41780 \begin_layout Standard
41783 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41784 Code box as described in section
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41791 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41798 \begin_layout Subsection
41800 \begin_inset Index idx
41803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41812 \begin_layout Standard
41815 Inserts a program listings box.
41816 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41818 Program Code Listings
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41831 \begin_layout Subsection
41835 \begin_layout Standard
41838 Inserts the actual date.
41839 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41844 \begin_layout Subsection
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41851 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41858 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41865 \begin_layout Section
41867 \begin_inset Index idx
41870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41882 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41883 \begin_inset space ~
41886 of the current document.
41887 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41890 \begin_layout Subsection
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41897 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41898 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41899 to jump, for example, between section
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41904 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41908 2.5 and use the submenu
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset space ~
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41938 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41944 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41954 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41959 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41962 \begin_layout Standard
41965 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41974 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41982 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41985 \begin_layout Subsection
41986 الملاحظة التالية, التغيير, الإشارة المرجعية
41989 \begin_layout Standard
41992 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41996 \begin_layout Subsection
42000 \begin_layout Standard
42003 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42004 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42005 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42021 \begin_layout Subsection
42025 \begin_layout Standard
42028 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42031 The \SpecialChar LyX
42032 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_inset space ~
42047 manual for a detailed description.
42050 \begin_layout Section
42052 \begin_inset Index idx
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 \begin_layout Subsection
42068 \begin_layout Standard
42071 Change Tracking is described in section
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42078 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42085 \begin_layout Subsection
42089 \begin_layout Standard
42092 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42093 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42094 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42096 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42097 to the clipboard or update the view.
42098 \begin_inset Newline newline
42101 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42105 \begin_layout Standard
42110 Open Containing Directory
42112 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42113 's temporary folder for the document.
42114 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42115 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42116 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42117 For example some journals require to send the
42121 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42125 \begin_layout Subsection
42129 \begin_layout Standard
42132 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42133 as described in section
42134 \begin_inset space ~
42138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42140 reference "sec:Appendices"
42147 \begin_layout Subsection
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_layout Standard
42158 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42159 default output format for the document (menu
42161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42162 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42163 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42165 \begin_inset space ~
42169 \begin_inset space ~
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42181 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42185 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42188 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42189 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42194 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42199 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42217 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42221 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42222 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42224 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42227 \begin_inset space ~
42230 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42232 \begin_inset space ~
42235 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42239 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42245 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42250 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42251 when it is first configured.
42252 The default output format is
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42263 \begin_layout Subsection
42267 \begin_layout Standard
42270 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42271 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42272 actual document with an external program.
42273 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42274 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42275 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42277 All possible formats are listed in section
42278 \begin_inset space ~
42282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42284 reference "subsec:Export"
42289 You should at least see the menu entry
42294 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42296 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42306 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42311 \begin_inset Index idx
42314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42328 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42329 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42331 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42332 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42334 \begin_inset space ~
42337 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42342 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42352 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42357 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42358 when it is first configured.
42361 \begin_layout Subsection
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_layout Standard
42372 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42373 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42376 \begin_layout Subsection
42380 \begin_layout Standard
42383 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42384 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42387 \begin_layout Subsection
42388 عرض المستند الرئيسي
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42394 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42415 manual for more information on this topic).
42416 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42417 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42421 \begin_inset space ~
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42430 generates the output of the whole book, while
42434 will just output the chapter alone.
42437 \begin_layout Standard
42440 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42441 in the document settings (menu
42443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42451 \begin_inset space ~
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42463 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42467 ) or in the preferences (menu
42469 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42470 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42475 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42480 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42492 \begin_inset space ~
42496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42498 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42505 \begin_layout Subsection
42506 تحديث المستند الرئيسي
42509 \begin_layout Standard
42512 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42533 manual for more information on this topic).
42534 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42535 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42538 \begin_layout Standard
42541 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42542 in the document settings (menu
42544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42546 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42564 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42568 ) or in the preferences (menu
42570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42571 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42576 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42578 \begin_inset space ~
42581 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42599 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42606 \begin_layout Subsection
42608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42610 name "subsec:Compressed"
42617 \begin_layout Standard
42620 Un/compresses the current document.
42621 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42622 compression (see the
42624 Additional Features
42626 manual for details).
42629 \begin_layout Subsection
42633 \begin_layout Standard
42636 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42639 \begin_layout Subsection
42643 \begin_layout Standard
42646 The document settings are described in appendix
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42653 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42660 \begin_layout Section
42662 \begin_inset Index idx
42665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42674 \begin_layout Subsection
42678 \begin_layout Standard
42679 المدقق الإملائي مشروح في القسم
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42686 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42693 \begin_layout Subsection
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42698 المكنز مشروح في القسم
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42705 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42712 \begin_layout Subsection
42714 \begin_inset Index idx
42717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42736 \begin_layout Standard
42739 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42740 the highlighted document part.
42743 \begin_layout Subsection
42745 \begin_inset Index idx
42748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42760 Generates with the help of the program
42762 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42765 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42766 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42767 This feature is not available on Windows.
42770 \begin_layout Subsection
42772 \begin_inset Index idx
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 \begin_layout Standard
42787 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42792 \begin_inset space ~
42797 to see the full filename paths.
42800 \begin_layout Subsection
42802 \begin_inset Index idx
42805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42817 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42818 files as described in section
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42825 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42832 \begin_layout Subsection
42834 \begin_inset Index idx
42837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42838 ليك ! إعادة ضبط|أنظر
42842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42849 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42867 \begin_inset Index idx
42870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42882 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42883 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42884 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42885 -packages and programs it needs; see
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42893 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42911 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42918 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42925 \begin_layout Section
42927 \begin_inset Index idx
42930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42939 \begin_layout Standard
42942 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42943 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42945 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42955 \begin_inset space ~
42960 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42961 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42962 packages and classes found
42963 by \SpecialChar LyX
42965 \begin_inset space ~
42969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42971 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42978 \begin_layout Standard
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42989 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42994 \begin_layout Section
42996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42998 name "sec:Toolbars"
43005 \begin_layout Standard
43008 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43009 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43015 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43025 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43026 This is described in the
43028 Additional Features
43033 \begin_layout Subsection
43035 \begin_inset Index idx
43038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43048 \begin_inset Graphics
43049 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43065 شريط الأدوات الأساسي الذي يظهر في أعلى النافذة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
43066 هي من اليمين لليسار:
43070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 \begin_inset Note Note
43085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43088 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43093 manual for more information.
43101 \begin_layout Standard
43102 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43108 \begin_layout Standard
43109 \begin_inset Tabular
43110 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43111 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43119 \begin_inset Graphics
43120 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 قائمة منسدلة بالبيئات التنسيقية المتوفرة في نوع المستند
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43148 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43154 \begin_layout Standard
43156 \begin_inset Tabular
43157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
43158 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43159 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43160 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43214 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43244 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43260 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43274 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43290 arg "spelling-continuously"
43298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43302 المصحح الإملائي المستمر
43308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43391 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43421 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43467 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43481 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
43523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43540 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43563 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
43564 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 تأكيد النص، دوال التحرير
43594 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43599 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 تعيين النص كاسم، دوال التحرير
43629 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43634 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43650 arg "textstyle-apply"
43658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 تهيئة النص حسب إعدادات التحرير الحالية
43664 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43669 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
43678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43701 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43702 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43722 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43750 arg "tabular-insert"
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43764 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
43771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43780 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43792 فتح وغلق نافذة الخلاصة،
43794 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
43801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43810 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43822 فتح وغلق شريط الرياضيات
43828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 فتح وغلق شريط الجدول
43862 \begin_layout Subsection
43864 \begin_inset Index idx
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43876 \begin_layout Standard
43877 \begin_inset Graphics
43878 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43887 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 شريط الأدوات الإضافي الذي يظهر فوق النص مباشرة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
43895 هي من اليمين لليسار:
43898 \begin_layout Standard
43899 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43906 \begin_inset Tabular
43907 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43908 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43909 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43910 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43947 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
43955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43974 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
43982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 arg "layout-toggle List"
44009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44055 arg "depth-increment"
44063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44069 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 arg "depth-decrement"
44101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 arg "float-insert figure"
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44146 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
44153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44162 arg "float-insert table"
44170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44176 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44177 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
44184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44207 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44223 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44253 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44267 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44297 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44317 arg "nomencl-insert"
44325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44331 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44333 \begin_inset space ~
44342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 arg "footnote-insert"
44359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44365 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44381 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44395 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44406 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44430 ملاحظة\SpecialChar menuseparator
44432 \begin_inset space ~
44441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44450 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44494 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44524 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44544 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44558 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44559 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
44566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
44590 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44610 arg "dialog-show character"
44618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44629 النص\SpecialChar menuseparator
44636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44645 arg "layout-paragraph"
44653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44659 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
44707 \begin_layout Subsection
44708 عرض/تحديث شريط الأدوات
44709 \begin_inset Index idx
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 شريط أدوات ! عرض / تحديث
44721 \begin_layout Standard
44722 \begin_inset Graphics
44723 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44730 \begin_layout Standard
44733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44739 \begin_layout Standard
44742 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44746 \begin_layout Standard
44749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44755 \begin_layout Standard
44756 \begin_inset Tabular
44757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44758 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 arg "buffer-update"
44809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44832 arg "master-buffer-view"
44840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44867 arg "master-buffer-update"
44875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44888 \begin_inset space ~
44897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44906 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44923 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44924 Synchronize with Output
44930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44955 View (Other Formats)
44961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 arg "update-others"
44976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44984 Update (Other Formats)
44997 \begin_layout Standard
45000 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45004 \begin_layout Subsection
45005 أشرطة الأدوات الأخرى
45008 \begin_layout Standard
45011 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45018 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45022 , the table toolbar
45025 \begin_inset Index idx
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45044 manual and the math macro toolbar
45047 \begin_inset Index idx
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 \begin_layout Chapter
45067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45069 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45074 \begin_inset Index idx
45077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45097 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45098 is called with the menu
45100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45104 You can save your document settings as default with the
45106 Save as Document Defaults
45108 button in any dialog.
45109 This will create a template named
45113 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45114 when you create a new document without
45118 \begin_layout Standard
45125 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45126 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45129 \begin_layout Standard
45132 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45133 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45134 to find the one you are looking for.
45135 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45136 the submenus of the dialog.
45138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45142 \begin_inset space \space{}
45146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45153 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45154 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45155 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45158 \begin_layout Section
45162 \begin_layout Standard
45165 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45167 Document classes are described in section
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45174 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45182 \begin_layout Standard
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45193 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45198 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45199 as a layout for a document class.
45200 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45202 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45211 \begin_layout Standard
45214 Some classes use special class options by default.
45215 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45219 and you can decide to use them or not.
45220 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45221 recommended you leave them untouched.
45226 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45227 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45232 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45234 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45242 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45243 \begin_inset Newline newline
45248 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45251 \begin_inset Newline newline
45254 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45255 distribution, see section
45260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45262 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45275 \begin_layout Standard
45282 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45283 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45284 in the background if the child document
45285 is opened without its master.
45286 This way child documents are always compilable.
45287 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45294 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_layout Standard
45305 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45318 \begin_inset Index idx
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45322 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
45328 \begin_inset Index idx
45331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45332 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
45339 for cross-references, see section
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45348 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45355 \begin_layout Section
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45362 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45363 Please refer to the section
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45379 manual for details.
45382 \begin_layout Section
45386 \begin_layout Standard
45389 Modules are explained in section
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45396 reference "subsec:Modules"
45403 \begin_layout Section
45407 \begin_layout Standard
45411 \begin_inset space ~
45415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45417 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45424 \begin_layout Section
45428 \begin_layout Standard
45431 The document font settings are described in section
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45438 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45445 \begin_layout Section
45449 \begin_layout Standard
45452 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45464 \begin_inset space ~
45469 and whether it should be a
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45477 can also be specified here.
45480 \begin_layout Standard
45483 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45484 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45485 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45487 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45495 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45498 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45499 justifies the text on screen.
45500 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45504 \begin_layout Section
45508 \begin_layout Standard
45511 This dialog is described in sections
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45518 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45525 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45532 \begin_layout Section
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45539 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45546 reference "subsec:Margins"
45553 \begin_layout Section
45555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45557 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45562 \begin_inset Index idx
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 \begin_layout Standard
45577 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45578 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45579 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45581 is always encoded in utf8).
45582 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45583 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45584 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45585 -command is not known for
45586 a particular character).
45589 \begin_layout Standard
45592 If you use the option
45597 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45598 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45599 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45601 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45602 exactly one encoding.
45603 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45606 \begin_layout Standard
45610 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45611 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45612 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45613 installation supports Unicode), choose
45614 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45615 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45616 is quite incomplete, so
45617 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45622 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45623 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45624 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45625 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45626 -commands is not used, because all
45627 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45628 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45629 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45630 , two new alternative engines
45631 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45633 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45635 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45638 \begin_inset space ~
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45666 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45671 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45675 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45678 \begin_layout Standard
45684 \begin_inset space ~
45689 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45690 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45700 The possible settings are:
45703 \begin_layout Description
45706 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45709 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45719 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45726 \begin_layout Description
45729 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45730 format you will use.
45731 In many cases this will be
45738 \begin_inset Index idx
45741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 If the newer package
45757 \begin_inset Index idx
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
45768 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45769 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45770 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45772 package will be used instead of
45779 \begin_layout Description
45783 \begin_inset space ~
45794 would be more appropriate.
45797 \begin_layout Description
45800 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45801 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45805 (for German texts), type in
45808 \begin_inset Newline newline
45813 usepackage{ngerman}
45816 \begin_layout Description
45819 None will not use a language package.
45820 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45823 \begin_layout Standard
45826 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45829 \begin_layout Description
45833 \begin_inset space ~
45837 \begin_inset space ~
45841 \begin_inset space ~
45848 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45856 \begin_inset Index idx
45859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
45868 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45869 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45870 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45874 \begin_layout Description
45877 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45879 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45880 commands, which may result in a big
45881 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45882 -commands are needed.
45885 \begin_layout Description
45889 \begin_inset space ~
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45896 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45899 \begin_layout Description
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45907 \begin_inset space ~
45910 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45913 \begin_layout Description
45917 \begin_inset space ~
45920 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45923 \begin_layout Description
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45931 \begin_inset space ~
45934 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45935 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45938 \begin_layout Description
45942 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45949 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45953 \begin_layout Description
45957 \begin_inset space ~
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45964 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45965 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45968 \begin_layout Description
45972 \begin_inset space ~
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45980 \begin_inset space ~
45983 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45984 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_layout Description
45994 \begin_inset space ~
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46005 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46006 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46009 \begin_layout Description
46013 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46020 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46021 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46022 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46023 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46024 \begin_inset space ~
46028 \begin_inset space ~
46034 \begin_layout Description
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46042 \begin_inset space ~
46045 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46046 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46047 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46049 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46054 \begin_inset space ~
46060 \begin_layout Description
46064 \begin_inset space ~
46068 \begin_inset space ~
46071 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46074 \begin_layout Description
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46085 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46088 \begin_layout Description
46092 \begin_inset space ~
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46099 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46102 \begin_layout Description
46106 \begin_inset space ~
46109 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46112 \begin_layout Description
46116 \begin_inset space ~
46119 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46122 \begin_layout Description
46126 \begin_inset space ~
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46133 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46136 \begin_layout Description
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_inset space ~
46150 \begin_layout Description
46154 \begin_inset space ~
46158 \begin_inset space ~
46161 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46164 \begin_layout Description
46168 \begin_inset space ~
46172 \begin_inset space ~
46178 \begin_layout Description
46182 \begin_inset space ~
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46189 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46197 \begin_inset Index idx
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46208 when using this, set the document language to
46213 \begin_layout Description
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46221 \begin_inset space ~
46224 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46229 , when using this, set the document language to
46232 \begin_inset space ~
46238 \begin_layout Description
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46246 \begin_inset space ~
46249 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46257 \begin_inset Index idx
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 حزمة لتيك ! japanese
46268 when using this, set the document language to
46273 \begin_layout Description
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46289 , when using this, set the document language to
46294 \begin_layout Description
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46302 \begin_inset space ~
46305 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46310 , when using this, set the document language to
46315 \begin_layout Description
46319 \begin_inset space ~
46322 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46325 \begin_layout Description
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46340 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46343 \begin_layout Description
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46351 \begin_inset space ~
46355 \begin_inset space ~
46358 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46359 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46360 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46363 \begin_layout Description
46367 \begin_inset space ~
46371 \begin_inset space ~
46377 \begin_layout Description
46381 \begin_inset space ~
46385 \begin_inset space ~
46388 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46389 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46392 \begin_layout Description
46396 \begin_inset space ~
46400 \begin_inset space ~
46403 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46411 \begin_inset Index idx
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46422 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46425 \begin_layout Description
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46440 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46447 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46450 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46457 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46458 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46460 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46463 \begin_layout Description
46467 \begin_inset space ~
46471 \begin_inset space ~
46474 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46482 \begin_inset Index idx
46485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46493 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46496 \begin_layout Description
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46503 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46511 \begin_inset Index idx
46514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46515 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
46523 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46527 \begin_layout Description
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46542 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46543 \begin_inset space ~
46549 \begin_layout Description
46553 \begin_inset space ~
46557 \begin_inset space ~
46561 \begin_inset space ~
46564 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46565 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46566 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46570 \begin_layout Description
46574 \begin_inset space ~
46578 \begin_inset space ~
46582 \begin_inset space ~
46585 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46586 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46589 \begin_layout Section
46591 \begin_inset Index idx
46594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 \begin_inset Index idx
46604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 \begin_inset Index idx
46614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46621 \begin_inset Index idx
46624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46633 \begin_layout Standard
46636 Here you can alter the font color for the
46640 (default: black), for
46643 \begin_inset space ~
46648 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46652 (default: white) and for
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46665 sets the color back to the default.
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46671 Clicking any button showing
46679 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46680 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46681 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46682 later more quickly.
46685 \begin_layout Standard
46688 Note, if you change the
46691 \begin_inset space ~
46696 font color and use the option
46699 \begin_inset space ~
46704 in the document settings under
46707 \begin_inset space ~
46712 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46719 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46729 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46735 \begin_layout Standard
46741 \begin_inset space ~
46750 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46753 \begin_inset space ~
46756 Code after a forced page break:
46759 \begin_layout Itemize
46762 For the page color:
46763 \begin_inset Newline newline
46770 pagecolor{color name}
46773 \begin_layout Itemize
46776 For the text color:
46777 \begin_inset Newline newline
46787 \begin_layout Standard
46790 You are restricted to one of
46826 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46839 \begin_inset Newline newline
46842 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46843 names to refer to them:
46846 \begin_layout Itemize
46854 \begin_inset Newline newline
46859 page_backgroundcolor
46862 \begin_layout Itemize
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46874 \begin_inset Newline newline
46882 \begin_layout Itemize
46888 \begin_inset space ~
46894 \begin_inset Newline newline
46902 \begin_layout Itemize
46908 \begin_inset space ~
46914 \begin_inset Newline newline
46922 \begin_layout Standard
46925 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46928 \begin_inset space ~
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46944 \begin_layout Section
46945 الترقيم & جدول المحتويات
46948 \begin_layout Standard
46951 Here you can adjust the
46955 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46959 as described in section
46960 \begin_inset space ~
46964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46966 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46973 \begin_layout Section
46977 \begin_layout Standard
46980 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46988 \begin_inset Index idx
46991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46992 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
47002 \begin_inset Index idx
47005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 \begin_inset Index idx
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
47032 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47035 Sectioned bibliography
47037 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47045 \begin_inset Index idx
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47049 حزمة لتيك ! bibtopic
47061 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47062 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47066 for the generation of the bibliography.
47067 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47074 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47081 \begin_layout Section
47085 \begin_layout Standard
47088 Here you can define the
47092 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47094 \begin_inset space ~
47098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47100 reference "sec:Index"
47107 \begin_layout Section
47111 \begin_layout Standard
47114 The PDF properties are explained in section
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47123 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47130 \begin_layout Section
47134 \begin_layout Standard
47137 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47138 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47146 \begin_inset Index idx
47149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 حزمة لتيك ! amsmath
47160 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47164 حزمة لتيك ! amssymb
47174 \begin_inset Index idx
47177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 \begin_inset Index idx
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 \begin_inset Index idx
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47206 حزمة لتيك ! mathdots
47216 \begin_inset Index idx
47219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47220 حزمة لتيك ! mathtools
47230 \begin_inset Index idx
47233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47244 \begin_inset Index idx
47247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 حزمة لتيك ! stackrel
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 حزمة لتيك ! stmaryrd
47272 \begin_inset Index idx
47275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 حزمة لتيك ! undertilde
47283 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47286 \begin_layout Description
47289 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47290 -errors in formulas,
47291 ensure that you have this enabled.
47294 \begin_layout Description
47297 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47298 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47299 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47303 \begin_layout Description
47306 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47321 \begin_layout Description
47324 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_layout Description
47342 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47353 \begin_layout Description
47356 mathtools is used for the math commands
47392 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47399 \begin_layout Description
47402 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47404 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47413 \begin_layout Description
47416 stackrel is used for the math command
47433 \begin_layout Description
47436 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47439 \begin_layout Description
47442 undertilde is used for the math command
47450 Accents for one Character
47459 \begin_layout Section
47463 \begin_layout Standard
47466 The float placement options are described in the section
47469 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_layout Section
47489 \begin_layout Standard
47492 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47494 Program Code Listings
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_layout Section
47511 \begin_layout Standard
47514 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47522 set to be used and set the
47527 The itemize environment is described in section
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47534 reference "sec:Itemize"
47541 \begin_layout Standard
47544 You can furthermore specify a
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47552 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47553 command of the desired character.
47554 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47561 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47567 \begin_inset space \space{}
47571 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47581 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47582 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47585 \begin_layout Standard
47588 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47597 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47598 -packages in the preamble (menu
47601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47602 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47605 \begin_inset space ~
47611 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47615 usepackage{textcomp}
47618 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47622 usepackage{amssymb}
47632 \begin_layout Section
47636 \begin_layout Standard
47639 Branches are described in section
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47646 reference "sec:Branches"
47653 \begin_layout Section
47655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47657 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47664 \begin_layout Standard
47667 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47670 \begin_layout Description
47674 \begin_inset space ~
47678 \begin_inset space ~
47681 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47701 View Master Document
47702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47709 Update Master Document
47710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47717 menu or the toolbar.
47718 The default is set in
47720 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47721 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47726 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47730 \begin_inset space ~
47734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47736 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47743 \begin_layout Description
47747 \begin_inset space ~
47751 \begin_inset space ~
47754 Output settings for the menu
47756 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47764 For a detailed description see section
47766 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47779 \begin_layout Description
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47790 Options offers settings for the export format
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47803 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47807 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47816 settings are described in detail in section
47818 Math Output in XHTML
47823 \begin_inset space ~
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_inset space ~
47841 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47844 \begin_layout Description
47848 \begin_inset space ~
47853 Save transient properties
47855 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47856 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47857 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47861 \begin_layout Itemize
47864 the activation of change tracking
47867 \begin_layout Itemize
47870 the output of tracked changes
47873 \begin_layout Itemize
47876 the recording of the document directory path.
47879 \begin_layout Standard
47882 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47883 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47887 \begin_layout Section
47891 \begin_layout Standard
47894 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47896 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47898 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47900 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47907 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47908 -syntax is given in section
47909 \begin_inset space ~
47913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47915 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47922 \begin_layout Chapter
47924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47926 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47931 \begin_inset Index idx
47934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47943 \begin_layout Standard
47946 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47948 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47952 It has the following submenus.
47955 \begin_layout Section
47959 \begin_layout Subsection
47963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47965 \begin_inset Index idx
47968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47969 تخصيص ! أشرطة الأدوات
47975 \begin_inset Index idx
47978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47979 تخصيص ! قائمة رئيسية
47987 \begin_layout Standard
47990 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47991 interface (ui) file.
47992 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48000 \begin_layout Description
48007 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48010 \begin_layout Description
48019 the menu entries in popup context menus
48022 \begin_layout Description
48029 specifies the toolbar buttons
48032 \begin_layout Standard
48035 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48036 and edit the entries.
48039 \begin_layout Standard
48042 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48054 entries must be finished with an explicit
48079 and in the case of the
48080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48092 The syntax for the entries is:
48095 \begin_layout Standard
48098 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48127 \begin_layout Standard
48131 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48134 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48135 -functions are listed in the menu
48137 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48147 \begin_layout Standard
48150 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48156 \begin_layout Standard
48159 For example, assuming you use the menu
48161 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48164 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48168 \begin_layout Standard
48171 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48195 \begin_layout Standard
48199 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48214 to have the sixth bookmark.
48217 \begin_layout Standard
48222 \begin_inset space ~
48227 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48228 's toolbar buttons.
48229 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48233 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48245 \begin_layout Standard
48250 Enable tool tips in main work area
48252 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48260 \begin_layout Standard
48266 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48267 should display in the menu
48269 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48271 \begin_inset space ~
48279 \begin_layout Subsection
48283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48287 \begin_layout Standard
48292 Restore window layouts and geometries
48295 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48296 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48300 \begin_layout Standard
48305 Restore cursor positions
48307 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48311 \begin_layout Standard
48316 Load opened files from last session
48318 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48327 Clear all session information
48329 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48330 sessions (cursor positions, names
48331 of last opened documents, etc.).
48334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48335 النسخ الاحتياطي & الحفظ
48336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48338 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48343 \begin_inset Index idx
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48347 نسخ احتياطي ! مستندات
48355 \begin_layout Standard
48359 Backup original documents when saving
48361 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48362 it was saved the last time.
48363 It is stored in the
48366 \begin_inset space ~
48372 \begin_inset space ~
48376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48378 reference "sec:Paths"
48382 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48385 \begin_inset space ~
48391 The backup file has the file extension
48392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48406 \begin_layout Standard
48411 Backup documents, every
48413 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48416 \begin_layout Standard
48420 Save documents compressed by default
48422 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48423 \begin_inset space ~
48427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48429 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48434 This applies to newly created documents only.
48435 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48439 النافذة & مساحة العمل
48442 \begin_layout Standard
48447 Open documents in tabs
48449 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48453 \begin_layout Standard
48460 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48469 \begin_inset space ~
48473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48475 reference "sec:Paths"
48479 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48486 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48487 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48488 of \SpecialChar LyX
48490 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48491 instance is created for each file.
48494 \begin_layout Standard
48499 Single close-tab button
48501 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48513 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48514 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48515 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48519 \begin_layout Standard
48522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48531 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48532 before the change takes effect.
48540 \begin_layout Standard
48547 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48549 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48551 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48555 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48556 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48557 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48560 \begin_layout Subsection
48562 \begin_inset Index idx
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48574 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48581 \begin_layout Standard
48584 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48588 \begin_layout Standard
48591 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 This section only deals with the fonts
48604 the \SpecialChar LyX
48606 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48610 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48621 \begin_layout Standard
48624 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48641 (depends on the system) as its
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48660 \begin_layout Standard
48663 You can change the font size with the
48670 \begin_layout Standard
48677 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48682 points have the size of 1
48683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48687 \begin_inset space ~
48691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48693 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48698 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48703 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48704 \begin_inset space ~
48708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48710 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48717 \begin_layout Subsection
48719 \begin_inset Index idx
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 \begin_inset Index idx
48732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 \begin_layout Standard
48744 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48745 by choosing an item in the
48746 list and selecting the
48753 \begin_layout Standard
48756 By checking the option
48760 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48763 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48764 \begin_inset space ~
48768 \begin_inset space ~
48773 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48776 \begin_layout Subsection
48778 \begin_inset Index idx
48781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48790 \begin_layout Standard
48793 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48797 \begin_layout Standard
48803 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48804 This feature is described in section
48805 \begin_inset space ~
48809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48811 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48818 \begin_layout Standard
48821 Checking the option
48824 \begin_inset space ~
48828 \begin_inset space ~
48832 \begin_inset space ~
48837 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48840 \begin_layout Section
48842 \begin_inset Index idx
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48854 \begin_layout Subsection
48858 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48862 \begin_layout Standard
48867 Cursor follows scrollbar
48869 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48873 \begin_layout Standard
48876 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48877 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48878 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48881 \begin_layout Standard
48885 Scroll below end of document
48887 is self-explanatory.
48890 \begin_layout Standard
48893 In \SpecialChar LyX
48894 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48901 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48903 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48904 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48907 \begin_layout Standard
48912 Sort environments alphabetically
48914 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48917 \begin_layout Standard
48922 Group environments by their category
48924 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48927 \begin_layout Standard
48934 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48949 \begin_layout Standard
48952 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48957 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48958 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48962 \begin_layout Subsection
48964 \begin_inset Index idx
48967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 \begin_inset Index idx
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 \begin_layout Standard
48992 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48994 Several binding files are available, among them:
48997 \begin_layout Description
49000 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49003 \begin_layout Description
49006 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49018 \begin_layout Description
49021 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49032 \begin_layout Standard
49035 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49040 , and binding files for special languages.
49041 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49046 \begin_inset space \space{}
49050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49058 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49059 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49060 will try to use the appropriate binding
49064 \begin_layout Standard
49067 Some binding files, like
49071 , only have a limited scope.
49072 When looking at the end of the file
49076 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49079 \begin_layout Standard
49085 \begin_inset space ~
49089 \begin_inset space ~
49094 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49095 in the selected key binding file.
49098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49102 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49107 \begin_inset Index idx
49110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49111 مفتاح الربط ! تحرير
49119 \begin_layout Standard
49122 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49123 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49124 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49125 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49128 Show key-bindings containing
49131 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49132 Insert there for example as keyword
49133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49140 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49141 functions that contain
49142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49150 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49151 All \SpecialChar LyX
49152 functions are also listed in the file
49157 that you will find in the
49164 \begin_layout Standard
49167 For example, to add the shortcut
49175 , select the function and press the
49180 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49181 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49184 \begin_layout Standard
49187 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49188 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49190 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49191 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49193 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49198 \begin_layout Standard
49201 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49204 \begin_layout Standard
49207 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49209 The syntax of the entries is:
49212 \begin_layout Standard
49219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49238 \begin_layout Standard
49241 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49242 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49270 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49271 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49272 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49273 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49275 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49279 , you needed to specify it as
49284 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49287 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49290 \begin_layout Subsection
49291 لوحة المفاتيح/الفارة
49292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49294 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49299 \begin_inset Index idx
49302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49303 خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
49309 \begin_inset Index idx
49312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49313 إعدادات ! خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
49321 \begin_layout Standard
49324 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49325 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49326 provides keyboard maps.
49327 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49328 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49331 \begin_inset space ~
49335 \begin_inset space ~
49340 and select the keyboard map file named
49347 \begin_layout Standard
49358 keyboard map and, if you use the
49362 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49367 arg "keymap-primary"
49377 arg "keymap-secondary"
49382 respectively or toggle between them with
49387 arg "keymap-toggle"
49395 \begin_layout Standard
49398 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49416 \begin_layout Standard
49419 You can also specify the mouse
49421 Wheel scrolling speed
49424 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49428 Middle mouse button pasting
49430 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49431 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49434 \begin_layout Standard
49444 \begin_inset space ~
49448 \begin_inset space ~
49453 you can select a key for zooming.
49454 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49457 \begin_layout Subsection
49458 الإكمال التلقائي للمدخلات
49461 \begin_layout Standard
49464 Input completion is described in section
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49471 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49478 \begin_layout Section
49480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49487 \begin_inset Index idx
49490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49497 \begin_inset Index idx
49500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 \begin_layout Standard
49512 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49513 are normally determined during
49515 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49518 \begin_layout Description
49522 \begin_inset space ~
49525 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49526 's working directory.
49527 It is the default when you
49538 \begin_inset space ~
49546 \begin_layout Description
49550 \begin_inset space ~
49553 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
49555 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49557 \begin_inset space ~
49561 \begin_inset space ~
49569 \begin_layout Description
49573 \begin_inset space ~
49576 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
49582 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49586 \begin_inset Newline newline
49590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49604 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49612 \begin_layout Description
49616 \begin_inset space ~
49622 \begin_inset Index idx
49625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49634 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49635 \begin_inset space ~
49639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49641 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49649 will be used to save the backups.
49650 \begin_inset Newline newline
49653 Backup files have the ending
49654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49664 \begin_layout Description
49668 \begin_inset space ~
49671 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49672 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49674 \begin_inset Newline newline
49681 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49687 You can edit this file with the program
49696 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49697 in its preferences under
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49706 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49711 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49713 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49714 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49720 and \SpecialChar LyX
49721 need to be running the same time.
49722 \begin_inset Newline newline
49725 The pipe is also used for the
49729 feature, see section
49730 \begin_inset space ~
49734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49736 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49741 \begin_inset Newline newline
49744 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49745 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49746 \begin_inset Newline newline
49762 \begin_layout Description
49766 \begin_inset space ~
49769 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49772 \begin_layout Description
49776 \begin_inset space ~
49779 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49780 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49781 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49784 \begin_layout Description
49788 \begin_inset space ~
49791 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49797 You only need to specify it if you are using
49801 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49803 For \SpecialChar LyX
49808 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49812 \begin_layout Description
49816 \begin_inset space ~
49819 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49820 When \SpecialChar LyX
49821 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49822 to find it on the system.
49823 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49825 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49834 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49835 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49838 \begin_layout Description
49842 \begin_inset space ~
49845 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49846 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49847 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49848 code or in the document
49850 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49852 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49853 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49854 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49855 scanned for the input files.
49856 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49857 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49859 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49860 compilation may fail for some documents.
49863 \begin_layout Section
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Here you can insert your
49879 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49881 \begin_inset space ~
49885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49887 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49891 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49894 \begin_layout Section
49896 \begin_inset Index idx
49899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49906 \begin_inset Index idx
49909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49918 \begin_layout Subsection
49920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49922 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49929 \begin_layout Description
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49937 \begin_inset space ~
49940 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49942 You can find its actual translation status here:
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49945 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49953 \begin_layout Description
49957 \begin_inset space ~
49960 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49961 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49962 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49963 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49980 The most widespread language package is
49987 \begin_inset Index idx
49990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49998 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50000 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50001 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50002 come with the alternative
50010 \begin_inset Index idx
50013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
50021 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50022 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50028 The available selections are described in section
50029 \begin_inset space ~
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50035 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50042 \begin_layout Description
50046 \begin_inset space ~
50049 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50050 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50051 you can here specify the command to start the package.
50052 An example is the start command
50058 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50060 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50080 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50085 \begin_layout Description
50089 \begin_inset space ~
50097 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50098 command toggles the package on and off.
50101 \begin_layout Description
50105 \begin_inset space ~
50109 \begin_inset space ~
50112 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50116 \begin_layout Description
50120 \begin_inset space ~
50124 \begin_inset space ~
50127 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50131 \begin_layout Description
50135 \begin_inset space ~
50139 \begin_inset space ~
50142 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
50143 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
50144 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50146 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50153 \begin_layout Description
50157 \begin_inset space ~
50160 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
50162 When this option is not set, the
50165 \begin_inset space ~
50170 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50172 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50175 \begin_inset space ~
50183 \begin_layout Description
50187 \begin_inset space ~
50193 \begin_inset space ~
50199 When it is not set, the
50202 \begin_inset space ~
50207 is set to the end of the document.
50210 \begin_layout Description
50214 \begin_inset space ~
50218 \begin_inset space ~
50221 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
50222 language will be underlined in blue.
50225 \begin_layout Description
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50233 \begin_inset space ~
50236 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50237 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50240 \begin_layout Description
50244 \begin_inset space ~
50247 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
50248 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50249 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
50250 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50253 \begin_layout Subsection
50257 \begin_layout Standard
50258 إعدادات المدقق الإملائي مشروحة في القسم
50259 \begin_inset space ~
50263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50265 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50272 \begin_layout Section
50276 \begin_layout Subsection
50278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50280 name "subsec:General-output"
50287 \begin_layout Description
50291 \begin_inset space ~
50294 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50296 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50298 \begin_inset space ~
50304 For a detailed description see section
50306 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50311 \begin_inset space ~
50319 \begin_layout Description
50323 \begin_inset space ~
50326 Options Options for the program
50330 that is used for the export format
50335 \begin_inset space ~
50339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50341 reference "subsec:Export"
50346 Possible options are listed in the
50351 \begin_inset Newline newline
50355 \begin_inset Flex URL
50358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50360 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50370 \begin_layout Description
50374 \begin_inset space ~
50378 \begin_inset space ~
50381 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50384 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50385 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50393 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50396 \begin_layout Description
50400 \begin_inset space ~
50406 \begin_inset Index idx
50409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50416 \begin_inset Index idx
50419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50420 إعدادات ! هيئة التاريخ
50427 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50428 \begin_inset Newline newline
50432 \begin_inset Flex URL
50435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50437 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50443 \begin_inset Newline newline
50451 \begin_inset Newline newline
50455 \begin_inset Newline newline
50460 طباعة التاريخ بالشكل يوم/شهر/عام
50463 \begin_layout Description
50467 \begin_inset space ~
50471 \begin_inset space ~
50474 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50475 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50478 \begin_layout Subsection
50480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50482 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50487 \begin_inset Index idx
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50499 \begin_layout Description
50503 \begin_inset space ~
50511 \begin_inset space ~
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50518 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50523 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50544 are used for Cyrillic.
50545 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50558 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50560 sets up in the background.
50561 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50564 \begin_layout Description
50568 \begin_inset space ~
50572 \begin_inset space ~
50576 \begin_inset space ~
50580 \begin_inset space ~
50583 options They only have an effect when the program
50587 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50590 \begin_layout Standard
50593 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50594 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50595 manuals of the applications.
50598 \begin_layout Description
50600 \begin_inset space ~
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50607 المراجع إعدادات إنتاج ثبت المراجع، انظر قسم
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50614 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50621 \begin_layout Description
50623 \begin_inset space ~
50626 الفهرس إعدادات إنتاج الفهرس، انظر القسم
50627 \begin_inset space ~
50631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50633 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50640 \begin_layout Description
50642 \begin_inset space ~
50646 \begin_inset space ~
50649 المصطلحات إعدادات إنتاج قائمة المصطلحات، انظر القسم
50650 \begin_inset space ~
50654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50656 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50663 \begin_layout Description
50671 \begin_inset space ~
50674 command Command for the program
50676 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50679 that is described in the section
50681 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50686 Additional Features
50691 \begin_layout Standard
50694 There are additionally the following options:
50697 \begin_layout Description
50701 \begin_inset space ~
50705 \begin_inset space ~
50709 \begin_inset space ~
50713 \begin_inset space ~
50718 \begin_inset space ~
50721 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50739 to separate folders.
50740 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50744 \begin_inset Index idx
50747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50754 \begin_inset Index idx
50757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50766 \begin_layout Description
50770 \begin_inset space ~
50774 \begin_inset space ~
50778 \begin_inset space ~
50782 \begin_inset space ~
50786 \begin_inset space ~
50790 \begin_inset space ~
50793 changes Removes all manually set
50799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50800 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50802 \begin_inset space ~
50807 dialog when changing the document class.
50810 \begin_layout Section
50812 \begin_inset Index idx
50815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50824 \begin_layout Subsection
50826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50828 name "subsec:Converters"
50833 \begin_inset Index idx
50836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50845 \begin_layout Standard
50848 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50849 from one format to another.
50850 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50851 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50858 \begin_inset space ~
50863 field and press the
50868 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50872 \begin_inset space ~
50877 drop-down list, modify the
50881 field and press the
50888 \begin_layout Standard
50893 Converter File Cache
50899 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50901 Maximum Age (in days
50904 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50905 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50908 \begin_layout Standard
50911 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50912 definition, is described in the section
50923 \begin_layout Subsection
50925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50927 name "sec:File-Formats"
50932 \begin_inset Index idx
50935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50942 \begin_inset Index idx
50945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50954 \begin_layout Standard
50957 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50967 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50970 \begin_layout Standard
50973 You can also define the
50975 Default output format
50977 that is used when you use
50979 View, Update, View Master Document
50983 Update Master Document
50989 menu or the toolbar.
50992 \begin_layout Standard
50995 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51006 \begin_layout Standard
51009 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51011 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51012 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51013 This is done by specifying a
51018 More about this is described in the section
51029 \begin_layout Chapter
51030 الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
51032 \begin_inset Index idx
51035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51044 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51051 \begin_layout Standard
51053 \begin_inset space ~
51057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51059 reference "tab:Units"
51063 يشرح كل الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
51064 وتستخدم في هذا المستند.
51067 \begin_layout Standard
51068 \begin_inset Float table
51074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51075 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51097 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51105 \begin_inset Tabular
51106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51109 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51110 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51262 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51298 عرض حرف M في الخط الحالي
51303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51327 ارتفاع حرف X في الخط الحالي
51332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51525 scaled point (65536
51526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51593 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51717 % من العرض الأصلي للصورة
51722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51726 \begin_inset space ~
51736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51809 \begin_layout Standard
51812 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51818 \begin_layout Standard
51819 ثبت المراجع التالي تم إنشاءه باستخدام بيئة ثبت المراجع.
51822 \begin_layout Bibliography
51823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51824 LatexCommand bibitem
51831 فريق \SpecialChar LyX
51833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51836 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51842 \begin_inset Newline newline
51846 \begin_inset Flex URL
51849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51851 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51859 \begin_layout Bibliography
51860 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51861 LatexCommand bibitem
51862 key "latexcompanion"
51869 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51871 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51872 Companion Second Edition.
51875 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51878 \begin_layout Bibliography
51879 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51880 LatexCommand bibitem
51888 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51891 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51895 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51898 \begin_layout Bibliography
51899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51900 LatexCommand bibitem
51911 : A Document Preparation System.
51914 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51917 \begin_layout Bibliography
51918 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51919 LatexCommand bibitem
51931 The \SpecialChar TeX
51935 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51938 \begin_layout Bibliography
51939 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51940 LatexCommand bibitem
51946 أصناف \SpecialChar TeX
51948 \begin_inset Newline newline
51952 \begin_inset Flex URL
51955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51957 https://ctan.org/topic
51965 \begin_layout Bibliography
51966 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51967 LatexCommand bibitem
51973 أسئلة شائعة عن \SpecialChar LaTeX
51975 \begin_inset Newline newline
51979 \begin_inset Flex URL
51982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51984 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51992 \begin_layout Bibliography
51993 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51994 LatexCommand bibitem
52001 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52004 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52011 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52015 \begin_inset Newline newline
52019 \begin_inset Flex URL
52022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52024 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52032 \begin_layout Bibliography
52033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52034 LatexCommand bibitem
52041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52044 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52051 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52055 \begin_inset Newline newline
52059 \begin_inset Flex URL
52062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52064 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52072 \begin_layout Bibliography
52073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52074 LatexCommand bibitem
52081 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52084 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52094 \begin_inset Index idx
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52098 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
52104 \begin_inset Newline newline
52108 \begin_inset Flex URL
52111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52113 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52121 \begin_layout Bibliography
52122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52123 LatexCommand bibitem
52130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52133 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52138 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52144 \begin_inset Index idx
52147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52154 \begin_inset Newline newline
52158 \begin_inset Flex URL
52161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52163 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52171 \begin_layout Bibliography
52172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52173 LatexCommand bibitem
52180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52183 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52193 \begin_inset Newline newline
52197 \begin_inset Flex URL
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52202 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52210 \begin_layout Bibliography
52211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52212 LatexCommand bibitem
52213 key "makeindex-man"
52219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52222 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52232 \begin_inset Newline newline
52236 \begin_inset Flex URL
52239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52241 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52249 \begin_layout Bibliography
52250 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52251 LatexCommand bibitem
52258 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52261 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52271 \begin_inset Newline newline
52275 \begin_inset Flex URL
52278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52280 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52288 \begin_layout Bibliography
52289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52290 LatexCommand bibitem
52297 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52300 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52305 عن حزمة AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52307 \begin_inset Newline newline
52311 \begin_inset Flex URL
52314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52316 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52324 \begin_layout Bibliography
52325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52326 LatexCommand bibitem
52333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52336 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52341 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52347 \begin_inset Index idx
52350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52351 حزمة لتيك ! caption
52357 \begin_inset Newline newline
52361 \begin_inset Flex URL
52364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52366 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52374 \begin_layout Bibliography
52375 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52376 LatexCommand bibitem
52383 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52386 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52391 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52397 \begin_inset Index idx
52400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52401 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
52407 \begin_inset Newline newline
52411 \begin_inset Flex URL
52414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52416 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52424 \begin_layout Bibliography
52425 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52426 LatexCommand bibitem
52433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52436 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52441 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52447 \begin_inset Index idx
52450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52451 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
52457 \begin_inset Newline newline
52461 \begin_inset Flex URL
52464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52466 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52474 \begin_layout Bibliography
52475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52476 LatexCommand bibitem
52483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52486 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52491 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52497 \begin_inset Index idx
52500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52501 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
52507 \begin_inset Newline newline
52511 \begin_inset Flex URL
52514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52524 \begin_layout Bibliography
52525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52526 LatexCommand bibitem
52533 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52536 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52541 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52547 \begin_inset Index idx
52550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52551 حزمة لتيك ! microtpye
52557 \begin_inset Newline newline
52561 \begin_inset Flex URL
52564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52566 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52574 \begin_layout Bibliography
52575 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52576 LatexCommand bibitem
52583 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52586 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52591 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52597 \begin_inset Index idx
52600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52601 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
52607 \begin_inset Newline newline
52611 \begin_inset Flex URL
52614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52616 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52624 \begin_layout Bibliography
52625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52626 LatexCommand bibitem
52633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52636 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52641 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52647 \begin_inset Index idx
52650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52651 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
52657 \begin_inset Newline newline
52661 \begin_inset Flex URL
52664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52666 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52674 \begin_layout Bibliography
52675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52676 LatexCommand bibitem
52683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52686 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52691 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
52697 \begin_inset Index idx
52700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
52707 \begin_inset Newline newline
52711 \begin_inset Flex URL
52714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52716 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52724 \begin_layout Bibliography
52725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52726 LatexCommand bibitem
52733 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52736 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52741 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52743 \begin_inset Newline newline
52747 \begin_inset Flex URL
52750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52752 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52760 \begin_layout Bibliography
52761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52762 LatexCommand bibitem
52769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52772 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52777 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52779 \begin_inset Newline newline
52783 \begin_inset Flex URL
52786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52788 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52796 \begin_layout Bibliography
52797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52798 LatexCommand bibitem
52807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52810 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52817 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52818 للكتابة بالسيريلية:
52819 \begin_inset Newline newline
52823 \begin_inset Flex URL
52826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52828 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52836 \begin_layout Bibliography
52837 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52838 LatexCommand bibitem
52845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52848 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52853 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52855 \begin_inset Newline newline
52859 \begin_inset Flex URL
52862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52864 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52872 \begin_layout Bibliography
52873 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52874 LatexCommand bibitem
52881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52884 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52889 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52891 \begin_inset Newline newline
52895 \begin_inset Flex URL
52898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52900 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52908 \begin_layout Bibliography
52909 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52910 LatexCommand bibitem
52917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52920 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52925 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
52926 للكتابة باليابانية:
52927 \begin_inset Newline newline
52931 \begin_inset Flex URL
52934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52936 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52944 \begin_layout Standard
52945 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52981 \begin_inset Note Note
52984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52993 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52994 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52995 bibliography is the second one:
53003 \begin_layout Standard
53004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53005 LatexCommand bibtex
53006 btprint "btPrintCited"
53007 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
53008 options "../biblio/alphadin"
53015 \begin_layout Standard
53016 ثبت المراجع في الأعلى تم إنشاءه من قاعدة بيانات Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53020 \begin_layout Standard
53024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53030 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53039 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53049 \begin_inset Note Note
53052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53056 \begin_inset space ~
53060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53062 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53074 \begin_layout Standard
53075 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53076 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53082 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53083 LatexCommand printindex